exceptions.c:print_flush: Remove obsolete check
[deliverable/binutils-gdb.git] / ld / ld.texi
1 \input texinfo
2 @setfilename ld.info
3 @c Copyright (C) 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
4 @syncodeindex ky cp
5 @c man begin INCLUDE
6 @include configdoc.texi
7 @c (configdoc.texi is generated by the Makefile)
8 @include bfdver.texi
9 @c man end
10
11 @c @smallbook
12
13 @macro gcctabopt{body}
14 @code{\body\}
15 @end macro
16
17 @c man begin NAME
18 @ifset man
19 @c Configure for the generation of man pages
20 @set UsesEnvVars
21 @set GENERIC
22 @set ARM
23 @set C6X
24 @set CSKY
25 @set H8300
26 @set HPPA
27 @set M68HC11
28 @set M68K
29 @set MIPS
30 @set MMIX
31 @set MSP430
32 @set NDS32
33 @set NIOSII
34 @set POWERPC
35 @set POWERPC64
36 @set Renesas
37 @set S/390
38 @set SPU
39 @set TICOFF
40 @set WIN32
41 @set XTENSA
42 @end ifset
43 @c man end
44
45 @ifnottex
46 @dircategory Software development
47 @direntry
48 * Ld: (ld). The GNU linker.
49 @end direntry
50 @end ifnottex
51
52 @copying
53 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker LD
54 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
55 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
56 @end ifset
57 version @value{VERSION}.
58
59 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
60
61 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
62 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
63 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
64 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
65 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
66 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
67 @end copying
68 @iftex
69 @finalout
70 @setchapternewpage odd
71 @settitle The GNU linker
72 @titlepage
73 @title The GNU linker
74 @sp 1
75 @subtitle @code{ld}
76 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
77 @subtitle @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
78 @end ifset
79 @subtitle Version @value{VERSION}
80 @author Steve Chamberlain
81 @author Ian Lance Taylor
82 @page
83
84 @tex
85 {\parskip=0pt
86 \hfill Red Hat Inc\par
87 \hfill nickc\@credhat.com, doc\@redhat.com\par
88 \hfill {\it The GNU linker}\par
89 \hfill Edited by Jeffrey Osier (jeffrey\@cygnus.com)\par
90 }
91 \global\parindent=0pt % Steve likes it this way.
92 @end tex
93
94 @vskip 0pt plus 1filll
95 @c man begin COPYRIGHT
96 Copyright @copyright{} 1991-2020 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
97
98 Permission is granted to copy, distribute and/or modify this document
99 under the terms of the GNU Free Documentation License, Version 1.3
100 or any later version published by the Free Software Foundation;
101 with no Invariant Sections, with no Front-Cover Texts, and with no
102 Back-Cover Texts. A copy of the license is included in the
103 section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
104 @c man end
105
106 @end titlepage
107 @end iftex
108 @contents
109 @c FIXME: Talk about importance of *order* of args, cmds to linker!
110
111 @ifnottex
112 @node Top
113 @top LD
114 This file documents the @sc{gnu} linker ld
115 @ifset VERSION_PACKAGE
116 @value{VERSION_PACKAGE}
117 @end ifset
118 version @value{VERSION}.
119
120 This document is distributed under the terms of the GNU Free
121 Documentation License version 1.3. A copy of the license is included
122 in the section entitled ``GNU Free Documentation License''.
123
124 @menu
125 * Overview:: Overview
126 * Invocation:: Invocation
127 * Scripts:: Linker Scripts
128 @ifset GENERIC
129 * Machine Dependent:: Machine Dependent Features
130 @end ifset
131 @ifclear GENERIC
132 @ifset H8300
133 * H8/300:: ld and the H8/300
134 @end ifset
135 @ifset Renesas
136 * Renesas:: ld and other Renesas micros
137 @end ifset
138 @ifset ARM
139 * ARM:: ld and the ARM family
140 @end ifset
141 @ifset M68HC11
142 * M68HC11/68HC12:: ld and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
143 @end ifset
144 @ifset HPPA
145 * HPPA ELF32:: ld and HPPA 32-bit ELF
146 @end ifset
147 @ifset M68K
148 * M68K:: ld and Motorola 68K family
149 @end ifset
150 @ifset MIPS
151 * MIPS:: ld and MIPS family
152 @end ifset
153 @ifset POWERPC
154 * PowerPC ELF32:: ld and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
155 @end ifset
156 @ifset POWERPC64
157 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: ld and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
158 @end ifset
159 @ifset S/390
160 * S/390 ELF:: ld and S/390 ELF Support
161 @end ifset
162 @ifset SPU
163 * SPU ELF:: ld and SPU ELF Support
164 @end ifset
165 @ifset TICOFF
166 * TI COFF:: ld and the TI COFF
167 @end ifset
168 @ifset WIN32
169 * Win32:: ld and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
170 @end ifset
171 @ifset XTENSA
172 * Xtensa:: ld and Xtensa Processors
173 @end ifset
174 @end ifclear
175 @ifclear SingleFormat
176 * BFD:: BFD
177 @end ifclear
178 @c Following blank line required for remaining bug in makeinfo conds/menus
179
180 * Reporting Bugs:: Reporting Bugs
181 * MRI:: MRI Compatible Script Files
182 * GNU Free Documentation License:: GNU Free Documentation License
183 * LD Index:: LD Index
184 @end menu
185 @end ifnottex
186
187 @node Overview
188 @chapter Overview
189
190 @cindex @sc{gnu} linker
191 @cindex what is this?
192
193 @ifset man
194 @c man begin SYNOPSIS
195 ld [@b{options}] @var{objfile} @dots{}
196 @c man end
197
198 @c man begin SEEALSO
199 ar(1), nm(1), objcopy(1), objdump(1), readelf(1) and
200 the Info entries for @file{binutils} and
201 @file{ld}.
202 @c man end
203 @end ifset
204
205 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
206
207 @command{ld} combines a number of object and archive files, relocates
208 their data and ties up symbol references. Usually the last step in
209 compiling a program is to run @command{ld}.
210
211 @command{ld} accepts Linker Command Language files written in
212 a superset of AT&T's Link Editor Command Language syntax,
213 to provide explicit and total control over the linking process.
214
215 @ifset man
216 @c For the man only
217 This man page does not describe the command language; see the
218 @command{ld} entry in @code{info} for full details on the command
219 language and on other aspects of the GNU linker.
220 @end ifset
221
222 @ifclear SingleFormat
223 This version of @command{ld} uses the general purpose BFD libraries
224 to operate on object files. This allows @command{ld} to read, combine, and
225 write object files in many different formats---for example, COFF or
226 @code{a.out}. Different formats may be linked together to produce any
227 available kind of object file. @xref{BFD}, for more information.
228 @end ifclear
229
230 Aside from its flexibility, the @sc{gnu} linker is more helpful than other
231 linkers in providing diagnostic information. Many linkers abandon
232 execution immediately upon encountering an error; whenever possible,
233 @command{ld} continues executing, allowing you to identify other errors
234 (or, in some cases, to get an output file in spite of the error).
235
236 @c man end
237
238 @node Invocation
239 @chapter Invocation
240
241 @c man begin DESCRIPTION
242
243 The @sc{gnu} linker @command{ld} is meant to cover a broad range of situations,
244 and to be as compatible as possible with other linkers. As a result,
245 you have many choices to control its behavior.
246
247 @c man end
248
249 @ifset UsesEnvVars
250 @menu
251 * Options:: Command-line Options
252 * Environment:: Environment Variables
253 @end menu
254
255 @node Options
256 @section Command-line Options
257 @end ifset
258
259 @cindex command line
260 @cindex options
261
262 @c man begin OPTIONS
263
264 The linker supports a plethora of command-line options, but in actual
265 practice few of them are used in any particular context.
266 @cindex standard Unix system
267 For instance, a frequent use of @command{ld} is to link standard Unix
268 object files on a standard, supported Unix system. On such a system, to
269 link a file @code{hello.o}:
270
271 @smallexample
272 ld -o @var{output} /lib/crt0.o hello.o -lc
273 @end smallexample
274
275 This tells @command{ld} to produce a file called @var{output} as the
276 result of linking the file @code{/lib/crt0.o} with @code{hello.o} and
277 the library @code{libc.a}, which will come from the standard search
278 directories. (See the discussion of the @samp{-l} option below.)
279
280 Some of the command-line options to @command{ld} may be specified at any
281 point in the command line. However, options which refer to files, such
282 as @samp{-l} or @samp{-T}, cause the file to be read at the point at
283 which the option appears in the command line, relative to the object
284 files and other file options. Repeating non-file options with a
285 different argument will either have no further effect, or override prior
286 occurrences (those further to the left on the command line) of that
287 option. Options which may be meaningfully specified more than once are
288 noted in the descriptions below.
289
290 @cindex object files
291 Non-option arguments are object files or archives which are to be linked
292 together. They may follow, precede, or be mixed in with command-line
293 options, except that an object file argument may not be placed between
294 an option and its argument.
295
296 Usually the linker is invoked with at least one object file, but you can
297 specify other forms of binary input files using @samp{-l}, @samp{-R},
298 and the script command language. If @emph{no} binary input files at all
299 are specified, the linker does not produce any output, and issues the
300 message @samp{No input files}.
301
302 If the linker cannot recognize the format of an object file, it will
303 assume that it is a linker script. A script specified in this way
304 augments the main linker script used for the link (either the default
305 linker script or the one specified by using @samp{-T}). This feature
306 permits the linker to link against a file which appears to be an object
307 or an archive, but actually merely defines some symbol values, or uses
308 @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} to load other objects. Specifying a
309 script in this way merely augments the main linker script, with the
310 extra commands placed after the main script; use the @samp{-T} option
311 to replace the default linker script entirely, but note the effect of
312 the @code{INSERT} command. @xref{Scripts}.
313
314 For options whose names are a single letter,
315 option arguments must either follow the option letter without intervening
316 whitespace, or be given as separate arguments immediately following the
317 option that requires them.
318
319 For options whose names are multiple letters, either one dash or two can
320 precede the option name; for example, @samp{-trace-symbol} and
321 @samp{--trace-symbol} are equivalent. Note---there is one exception to
322 this rule. Multiple letter options that start with a lower case 'o' can
323 only be preceded by two dashes. This is to reduce confusion with the
324 @samp{-o} option. So for example @samp{-omagic} sets the output file
325 name to @samp{magic} whereas @samp{--omagic} sets the NMAGIC flag on the
326 output.
327
328 Arguments to multiple-letter options must either be separated from the
329 option name by an equals sign, or be given as separate arguments
330 immediately following the option that requires them. For example,
331 @samp{--trace-symbol foo} and @samp{--trace-symbol=foo} are equivalent.
332 Unique abbreviations of the names of multiple-letter options are
333 accepted.
334
335 Note---if the linker is being invoked indirectly, via a compiler driver
336 (e.g. @samp{gcc}) then all the linker command-line options should be
337 prefixed by @samp{-Wl,} (or whatever is appropriate for the particular
338 compiler driver) like this:
339
340 @smallexample
341 gcc -Wl,--start-group foo.o bar.o -Wl,--end-group
342 @end smallexample
343
344 This is important, because otherwise the compiler driver program may
345 silently drop the linker options, resulting in a bad link. Confusion
346 may also arise when passing options that require values through a
347 driver, as the use of a space between option and argument acts as
348 a separator, and causes the driver to pass only the option to the linker
349 and the argument to the compiler. In this case, it is simplest to use
350 the joined forms of both single- and multiple-letter options, such as:
351
352 @smallexample
353 gcc foo.o bar.o -Wl,-eENTRY -Wl,-Map=a.map
354 @end smallexample
355
356 Here is a table of the generic command-line switches accepted by the GNU
357 linker:
358
359 @table @gcctabopt
360 @include at-file.texi
361
362 @kindex -a @var{keyword}
363 @item -a @var{keyword}
364 This option is supported for HP/UX compatibility. The @var{keyword}
365 argument must be one of the strings @samp{archive}, @samp{shared}, or
366 @samp{default}. @samp{-aarchive} is functionally equivalent to
367 @samp{-Bstatic}, and the other two keywords are functionally equivalent
368 to @samp{-Bdynamic}. This option may be used any number of times.
369
370 @kindex --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
371 @item --audit @var{AUDITLIB}
372 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_AUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
373 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
374 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_AUDIT}
375 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. If the linker
376 finds an object with an audit entry while searching for shared libraries,
377 it will add a corresponding @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry in the output file.
378 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit
379 interface.
380
381 @ifclear SingleFormat
382 @cindex binary input format
383 @kindex -b @var{format}
384 @kindex --format=@var{format}
385 @cindex input format
386 @cindex input format
387 @item -b @var{input-format}
388 @itemx --format=@var{input-format}
389 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
390 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
391 @samp{-b} option to specify the binary format for input object files
392 that follow this option on the command line. Even when @command{ld} is
393 configured to support alternative object formats, you don't usually need
394 to specify this, as @command{ld} should be configured to expect as a
395 default input format the most usual format on each machine.
396 @var{input-format} is a text string, the name of a particular format
397 supported by the BFD libraries. (You can list the available binary
398 formats with @samp{objdump -i}.)
399 @xref{BFD}.
400
401 You may want to use this option if you are linking files with an unusual
402 binary format. You can also use @samp{-b} to switch formats explicitly (when
403 linking object files of different formats), by including
404 @samp{-b @var{input-format}} before each group of object files in a
405 particular format.
406
407 The default format is taken from the environment variable
408 @code{GNUTARGET}.
409 @ifset UsesEnvVars
410 @xref{Environment}.
411 @end ifset
412 You can also define the input format from a script, using the command
413 @code{TARGET};
414 @ifclear man
415 see @ref{Format Commands}.
416 @end ifclear
417 @end ifclear
418
419 @kindex -c @var{MRI-cmdfile}
420 @kindex --mri-script=@var{MRI-cmdfile}
421 @cindex compatibility, MRI
422 @item -c @var{MRI-commandfile}
423 @itemx --mri-script=@var{MRI-commandfile}
424 For compatibility with linkers produced by MRI, @command{ld} accepts script
425 files written in an alternate, restricted command language, described in
426 @ifclear man
427 @ref{MRI,,MRI Compatible Script Files}.
428 @end ifclear
429 @ifset man
430 the MRI Compatible Script Files section of GNU ld documentation.
431 @end ifset
432 Introduce MRI script files with
433 the option @samp{-c}; use the @samp{-T} option to run linker
434 scripts written in the general-purpose @command{ld} scripting language.
435 If @var{MRI-cmdfile} does not exist, @command{ld} looks for it in the directories
436 specified by any @samp{-L} options.
437
438 @cindex common allocation
439 @kindex -d
440 @kindex -dc
441 @kindex -dp
442 @item -d
443 @itemx -dc
444 @itemx -dp
445 These three options are equivalent; multiple forms are supported for
446 compatibility with other linkers. They assign space to common symbols
447 even if a relocatable output file is specified (with @samp{-r}). The
448 script command @code{FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
449 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
450
451 @kindex --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
452 @kindex -P @var{AUDITLIB}
453 @item --depaudit @var{AUDITLIB}
454 @itemx -P @var{AUDITLIB}
455 Adds @var{AUDITLIB} to the @code{DT_DEPAUDIT} entry of the dynamic section.
456 @var{AUDITLIB} is not checked for existence, nor will it use the DT_SONAME
457 specified in the library. If specified multiple times @code{DT_DEPAUDIT}
458 will contain a colon separated list of audit interfaces to use. This
459 option is only meaningful on ELF platforms supporting the rtld-audit interface.
460 The -P option is provided for Solaris compatibility.
461
462 @cindex entry point, from command line
463 @kindex -e @var{entry}
464 @kindex --entry=@var{entry}
465 @item -e @var{entry}
466 @itemx --entry=@var{entry}
467 Use @var{entry} as the explicit symbol for beginning execution of your
468 program, rather than the default entry point. If there is no symbol
469 named @var{entry}, the linker will try to parse @var{entry} as a number,
470 and use that as the entry address (the number will be interpreted in
471 base 10; you may use a leading @samp{0x} for base 16, or a leading
472 @samp{0} for base 8). @xref{Entry Point}, for a discussion of defaults
473 and other ways of specifying the entry point.
474
475 @kindex --exclude-libs
476 @item --exclude-libs @var{lib},@var{lib},...
477 Specifies a list of archive libraries from which symbols should not be automatically
478 exported. The library names may be delimited by commas or colons. Specifying
479 @code{--exclude-libs ALL} excludes symbols in all archive libraries from
480 automatic export. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted
481 port of the linker and for ELF targeted ports. For i386 PE, symbols
482 explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported, regardless of this
483 option. For ELF targeted ports, symbols affected by this option will
484 be treated as hidden.
485
486 @kindex --exclude-modules-for-implib
487 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib @var{module},@var{module},...
488 Specifies a list of object files or archive members, from which symbols
489 should not be automatically exported, but which should be copied wholesale
490 into the import library being generated during the link. The module names
491 may be delimited by commas or colons, and must match exactly the filenames
492 used by @command{ld} to open the files; for archive members, this is simply
493 the member name, but for object files the name listed must include and
494 match precisely any path used to specify the input file on the linker's
495 command-line. This option is available only for the i386 PE targeted port
496 of the linker. Symbols explicitly listed in a .def file are still exported,
497 regardless of this option.
498
499 @cindex dynamic symbol table
500 @kindex -E
501 @kindex --export-dynamic
502 @kindex --no-export-dynamic
503 @item -E
504 @itemx --export-dynamic
505 @itemx --no-export-dynamic
506 When creating a dynamically linked executable, using the @option{-E}
507 option or the @option{--export-dynamic} option causes the linker to add
508 all symbols to the dynamic symbol table. The dynamic symbol table is the
509 set of symbols which are visible from dynamic objects at run time.
510
511 If you do not use either of these options (or use the
512 @option{--no-export-dynamic} option to restore the default behavior), the
513 dynamic symbol table will normally contain only those symbols which are
514 referenced by some dynamic object mentioned in the link.
515
516 If you use @code{dlopen} to load a dynamic object which needs to refer
517 back to the symbols defined by the program, rather than some other
518 dynamic object, then you will probably need to use this option when
519 linking the program itself.
520
521 You can also use the dynamic list to control what symbols should
522 be added to the dynamic symbol table if the output format supports it.
523 See the description of @samp{--dynamic-list}.
524
525 Note that this option is specific to ELF targeted ports. PE targets
526 support a similar function to export all symbols from a DLL or EXE; see
527 the description of @samp{--export-all-symbols} below.
528
529 @ifclear SingleFormat
530 @cindex big-endian objects
531 @cindex endianness
532 @kindex -EB
533 @item -EB
534 Link big-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
535
536 @cindex little-endian objects
537 @kindex -EL
538 @item -EL
539 Link little-endian objects. This affects the default output format.
540 @end ifclear
541
542 @kindex -f @var{name}
543 @kindex --auxiliary=@var{name}
544 @item -f @var{name}
545 @itemx --auxiliary=@var{name}
546 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_AUXILIARY field
547 to the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol
548 table of the shared object should be used as an auxiliary filter on the
549 symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
550
551 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
552 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_AUXILIARY field. If
553 the dynamic linker resolves any symbols from the filter object, it will
554 first check whether there is a definition in the shared object
555 @var{name}. If there is one, it will be used instead of the definition
556 in the filter object. The shared object @var{name} need not exist.
557 Thus the shared object @var{name} may be used to provide an alternative
558 implementation of certain functions, perhaps for debugging or for
559 machine-specific performance.
560
561 This option may be specified more than once. The DT_AUXILIARY entries
562 will be created in the order in which they appear on the command line.
563
564 @kindex -F @var{name}
565 @kindex --filter=@var{name}
566 @item -F @var{name}
567 @itemx --filter=@var{name}
568 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_FILTER field to
569 the specified name. This tells the dynamic linker that the symbol table
570 of the shared object which is being created should be used as a filter
571 on the symbol table of the shared object @var{name}.
572
573 If you later link a program against this filter object, then, when you
574 run the program, the dynamic linker will see the DT_FILTER field. The
575 dynamic linker will resolve symbols according to the symbol table of the
576 filter object as usual, but it will actually link to the definitions
577 found in the shared object @var{name}. Thus the filter object can be
578 used to select a subset of the symbols provided by the object
579 @var{name}.
580
581 Some older linkers used the @option{-F} option throughout a compilation
582 toolchain for specifying object-file format for both input and output
583 object files.
584 @ifclear SingleFormat
585 The @sc{gnu} linker uses other mechanisms for this purpose: the
586 @option{-b}, @option{--format}, @option{--oformat} options, the
587 @code{TARGET} command in linker scripts, and the @code{GNUTARGET}
588 environment variable.
589 @end ifclear
590 The @sc{gnu} linker will ignore the @option{-F} option when not
591 creating an ELF shared object.
592
593 @cindex finalization function
594 @kindex -fini=@var{name}
595 @item -fini=@var{name}
596 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
597 executable or shared object is unloaded, by setting DT_FINI to the
598 address of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_fini} as
599 the function to call.
600
601 @kindex -g
602 @item -g
603 Ignored. Provided for compatibility with other tools.
604
605 @kindex -G @var{value}
606 @kindex --gpsize=@var{value}
607 @cindex object size
608 @item -G @var{value}
609 @itemx --gpsize=@var{value}
610 Set the maximum size of objects to be optimized using the GP register to
611 @var{size}. This is only meaningful for object file formats such as
612 MIPS ELF that support putting large and small objects into different
613 sections. This is ignored for other object file formats.
614
615 @cindex runtime library name
616 @kindex -h @var{name}
617 @kindex -soname=@var{name}
618 @item -h @var{name}
619 @itemx -soname=@var{name}
620 When creating an ELF shared object, set the internal DT_SONAME field to
621 the specified name. When an executable is linked with a shared object
622 which has a DT_SONAME field, then when the executable is run the dynamic
623 linker will attempt to load the shared object specified by the DT_SONAME
624 field rather than the using the file name given to the linker.
625
626 @kindex -i
627 @cindex incremental link
628 @item -i
629 Perform an incremental link (same as option @samp{-r}).
630
631 @cindex initialization function
632 @kindex -init=@var{name}
633 @item -init=@var{name}
634 When creating an ELF executable or shared object, call NAME when the
635 executable or shared object is loaded, by setting DT_INIT to the address
636 of the function. By default, the linker uses @code{_init} as the
637 function to call.
638
639 @cindex archive files, from cmd line
640 @kindex -l @var{namespec}
641 @kindex --library=@var{namespec}
642 @item -l @var{namespec}
643 @itemx --library=@var{namespec}
644 Add the archive or object file specified by @var{namespec} to the
645 list of files to link. This option may be used any number of times.
646 If @var{namespec} is of the form @file{:@var{filename}}, @command{ld}
647 will search the library path for a file called @var{filename}, otherwise it
648 will search the library path for a file called @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}.
649
650 On systems which support shared libraries, @command{ld} may also search for
651 files other than @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. Specifically, on ELF
652 and SunOS systems, @command{ld} will search a directory for a library
653 called @file{lib@var{namespec}.so} before searching for one called
654 @file{lib@var{namespec}.a}. (By convention, a @code{.so} extension
655 indicates a shared library.) Note that this behavior does not apply
656 to @file{:@var{filename}}, which always specifies a file called
657 @var{filename}.
658
659 The linker will search an archive only once, at the location where it is
660 specified on the command line. If the archive defines a symbol which
661 was undefined in some object which appeared before the archive on the
662 command line, the linker will include the appropriate file(s) from the
663 archive. However, an undefined symbol in an object appearing later on
664 the command line will not cause the linker to search the archive again.
665
666 See the @option{-(} option for a way to force the linker to search
667 archives multiple times.
668
669 You may list the same archive multiple times on the command line.
670
671 @ifset GENERIC
672 This type of archive searching is standard for Unix linkers. However,
673 if you are using @command{ld} on AIX, note that it is different from the
674 behaviour of the AIX linker.
675 @end ifset
676
677 @cindex search directory, from cmd line
678 @kindex -L @var{dir}
679 @kindex --library-path=@var{dir}
680 @item -L @var{searchdir}
681 @itemx --library-path=@var{searchdir}
682 Add path @var{searchdir} to the list of paths that @command{ld} will search
683 for archive libraries and @command{ld} control scripts. You may use this
684 option any number of times. The directories are searched in the order
685 in which they are specified on the command line. Directories specified
686 on the command line are searched before the default directories. All
687 @option{-L} options apply to all @option{-l} options, regardless of the
688 order in which the options appear. @option{-L} options do not affect
689 how @command{ld} searches for a linker script unless @option{-T}
690 option is specified.
691
692 If @var{searchdir} begins with @code{=} or @code{$SYSROOT}, then this
693 prefix will be replaced by the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, controlled by the
694 @samp{--sysroot} option, or specified when the linker is configured.
695
696 @ifset UsesEnvVars
697 The default set of paths searched (without being specified with
698 @samp{-L}) depends on which emulation mode @command{ld} is using, and in
699 some cases also on how it was configured. @xref{Environment}.
700 @end ifset
701
702 The paths can also be specified in a link script with the
703 @code{SEARCH_DIR} command. Directories specified this way are searched
704 at the point in which the linker script appears in the command line.
705
706 @cindex emulation
707 @kindex -m @var{emulation}
708 @item -m @var{emulation}
709 Emulate the @var{emulation} linker. You can list the available
710 emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options.
711
712 If the @samp{-m} option is not used, the emulation is taken from the
713 @code{LDEMULATION} environment variable, if that is defined.
714
715 Otherwise, the default emulation depends upon how the linker was
716 configured.
717
718 @cindex link map
719 @kindex -M
720 @kindex --print-map
721 @item -M
722 @itemx --print-map
723 Print a link map to the standard output. A link map provides
724 information about the link, including the following:
725
726 @itemize @bullet
727 @item
728 Where object files are mapped into memory.
729 @item
730 How common symbols are allocated.
731 @item
732 All archive members included in the link, with a mention of the symbol
733 which caused the archive member to be brought in.
734 @item
735 The values assigned to symbols.
736
737 Note - symbols whose values are computed by an expression which
738 involves a reference to a previous value of the same symbol may not
739 have correct result displayed in the link map. This is because the
740 linker discards intermediate results and only retains the final value
741 of an expression. Under such circumstances the linker will display
742 the final value enclosed by square brackets. Thus for example a
743 linker script containing:
744
745 @smallexample
746 foo = 1
747 foo = foo * 4
748 foo = foo + 8
749 @end smallexample
750
751 will produce the following output in the link map if the @option{-M}
752 option is used:
753
754 @smallexample
755 0x00000001 foo = 0x1
756 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo * 0x4)
757 [0x0000000c] foo = (foo + 0x8)
758 @end smallexample
759
760 See @ref{Expressions} for more information about expressions in linker
761 scripts.
762
763 @item
764 How GNU properties are merged.
765
766 When the linker merges input .note.gnu.property sections into one output
767 .note.gnu.property section, some properties are removed or updated.
768 These actions are reported in the link map. For example:
769
770 @smallexample
771 Removed property 0xc0000002 to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (not found)
772 @end smallexample
773
774 This indicates that property 0xc0000002 is removed from output when
775 merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose property 0xc0000002 value
776 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, which doesn't have property 0xc0000002.
777
778 @smallexample
779 Updated property 0xc0010001 (0x1) to merge foo.o (0x1) and bar.o (0x1)
780 @end smallexample
781
782 This indicates that property 0xc0010001 value is updated to 0x1 in output
783 when merging properties in @file{foo.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value
784 is 0x1, and @file{bar.o}, whose 0xc0010001 property value is 0x1.
785 @end itemize
786
787 @cindex link map discarded
788 @kindex --print-map-discarded
789 @kindex --no-print-map-discarded
790 @item --print-map-discarded
791 @itemx --no-print-map-discarded
792 Print (or do not print) the list of discarded and garbage collected sections
793 in the link map. Enabled by default.
794
795 @kindex -n
796 @cindex read-only text
797 @cindex NMAGIC
798 @kindex --nmagic
799 @item -n
800 @itemx --nmagic
801 Turn off page alignment of sections, and disable linking against shared
802 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
803 mark the output as @code{NMAGIC}.
804
805 @kindex -N
806 @kindex --omagic
807 @cindex read/write from cmd line
808 @cindex OMAGIC
809 @item -N
810 @itemx --omagic
811 Set the text and data sections to be readable and writable. Also, do
812 not page-align the data segment, and disable linking against shared
813 libraries. If the output format supports Unix style magic numbers,
814 mark the output as @code{OMAGIC}. Note: Although a writable text section
815 is allowed for PE-COFF targets, it does not conform to the format
816 specification published by Microsoft.
817
818 @kindex --no-omagic
819 @cindex OMAGIC
820 @item --no-omagic
821 This option negates most of the effects of the @option{-N} option. It
822 sets the text section to be read-only, and forces the data segment to
823 be page-aligned. Note - this option does not enable linking against
824 shared libraries. Use @option{-Bdynamic} for this.
825
826 @kindex -o @var{output}
827 @kindex --output=@var{output}
828 @cindex naming the output file
829 @item -o @var{output}
830 @itemx --output=@var{output}
831 Use @var{output} as the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; if this
832 option is not specified, the name @file{a.out} is used by default. The
833 script command @code{OUTPUT} can also specify the output file name.
834
835 @kindex -O @var{level}
836 @cindex generating optimized output
837 @item -O @var{level}
838 If @var{level} is a numeric values greater than zero @command{ld} optimizes
839 the output. This might take significantly longer and therefore probably
840 should only be enabled for the final binary. At the moment this
841 option only affects ELF shared library generation. Future releases of
842 the linker may make more use of this option. Also currently there is
843 no difference in the linker's behaviour for different non-zero values
844 of this option. Again this may change with future releases.
845
846 @kindex -plugin @var{name}
847 @item -plugin @var{name}
848 Involve a plugin in the linking process. The @var{name} parameter is
849 the absolute filename of the plugin. Usually this parameter is
850 automatically added by the complier, when using link time
851 optimization, but users can also add their own plugins if they so
852 wish.
853
854 Note that the location of the compiler originated plugins is different
855 from the place where the @command{ar}, @command{nm} and
856 @command{ranlib} programs search for their plugins. In order for
857 those commands to make use of a compiler based plugin it must first be
858 copied into the @file{$@{libdir@}/bfd-plugins} directory. All gcc
859 based linker plugins are backward compatible, so it is sufficient to
860 just copy in the newest one.
861
862 @kindex --push-state
863 @cindex push state governing input file handling
864 @item --push-state
865 The @option{--push-state} allows to preserve the current state of the
866 flags which govern the input file handling so that they can all be
867 restored with one corresponding @option{--pop-state} option.
868
869 The option which are covered are: @option{-Bdynamic}, @option{-Bstatic},
870 @option{-dn}, @option{-dy}, @option{-call_shared}, @option{-non_shared},
871 @option{-static}, @option{-N}, @option{-n}, @option{--whole-archive},
872 @option{--no-whole-archive}, @option{-r}, @option{-Ur},
873 @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}, @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries},
874 @option{--as-needed}, @option{--no-as-needed}, and @option{-a}.
875
876 One target for this option are specifications for @file{pkg-config}. When
877 used with the @option{--libs} option all possibly needed libraries are
878 listed and then possibly linked with all the time. It is better to return
879 something as follows:
880
881 @smallexample
882 -Wl,--push-state,--as-needed -libone -libtwo -Wl,--pop-state
883 @end smallexample
884
885 @kindex --pop-state
886 @cindex pop state governing input file handling
887 @item --pop-state
888 Undoes the effect of --push-state, restores the previous values of the
889 flags governing input file handling.
890
891 @kindex -q
892 @kindex --emit-relocs
893 @cindex retain relocations in final executable
894 @item -q
895 @itemx --emit-relocs
896 Leave relocation sections and contents in fully linked executables.
897 Post link analysis and optimization tools may need this information in
898 order to perform correct modifications of executables. This results
899 in larger executables.
900
901 This option is currently only supported on ELF platforms.
902
903 @kindex --force-dynamic
904 @cindex forcing the creation of dynamic sections
905 @item --force-dynamic
906 Force the output file to have dynamic sections. This option is specific
907 to VxWorks targets.
908
909 @cindex partial link
910 @cindex relocatable output
911 @kindex -r
912 @kindex --relocatable
913 @item -r
914 @itemx --relocatable
915 Generate relocatable output---i.e., generate an output file that can in
916 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. This is often called @dfn{partial
917 linking}. As a side effect, in environments that support standard Unix
918 magic numbers, this option also sets the output file's magic number to
919 @code{OMAGIC}.
920 @c ; see @option{-N}.
921 If this option is not specified, an absolute file is produced. When
922 linking C++ programs, this option @emph{will not} resolve references to
923 constructors; to do that, use @samp{-Ur}.
924
925 When an input file does not have the same format as the output file,
926 partial linking is only supported if that input file does not contain any
927 relocations. Different output formats can have further restrictions; for
928 example some @code{a.out}-based formats do not support partial linking
929 with input files in other formats at all.
930
931 This option does the same thing as @samp{-i}.
932
933 @kindex -R @var{file}
934 @kindex --just-symbols=@var{file}
935 @cindex symbol-only input
936 @item -R @var{filename}
937 @itemx --just-symbols=@var{filename}
938 Read symbol names and their addresses from @var{filename}, but do not
939 relocate it or include it in the output. This allows your output file
940 to refer symbolically to absolute locations of memory defined in other
941 programs. You may use this option more than once.
942
943 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
944 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
945 the @option{-rpath} option.
946
947 @kindex -s
948 @kindex --strip-all
949 @cindex strip all symbols
950 @item -s
951 @itemx --strip-all
952 Omit all symbol information from the output file.
953
954 @kindex -S
955 @kindex --strip-debug
956 @cindex strip debugger symbols
957 @item -S
958 @itemx --strip-debug
959 Omit debugger symbol information (but not all symbols) from the output file.
960
961 @kindex --strip-discarded
962 @kindex --no-strip-discarded
963 @item --strip-discarded
964 @itemx --no-strip-discarded
965 Omit (or do not omit) global symbols defined in discarded sections.
966 Enabled by default.
967
968 @kindex -t
969 @kindex --trace
970 @cindex input files, displaying
971 @item -t
972 @itemx --trace
973 Print the names of the input files as @command{ld} processes them. If
974 @samp{-t} is given twice then members within archives are also printed.
975 @samp{-t} output is useful to generate a list of all the object files
976 and scripts involved in linking, for example, when packaging files for
977 a linker bug report.
978
979 @kindex -T @var{script}
980 @kindex --script=@var{script}
981 @cindex script files
982 @item -T @var{scriptfile}
983 @itemx --script=@var{scriptfile}
984 Use @var{scriptfile} as the linker script. This script replaces
985 @command{ld}'s default linker script (rather than adding to it), so
986 @var{commandfile} must specify everything necessary to describe the
987 output file. @xref{Scripts}. If @var{scriptfile} does not exist in
988 the current directory, @code{ld} looks for it in the directories
989 specified by any preceding @samp{-L} options. Multiple @samp{-T}
990 options accumulate.
991
992 @kindex -dT @var{script}
993 @kindex --default-script=@var{script}
994 @cindex script files
995 @item -dT @var{scriptfile}
996 @itemx --default-script=@var{scriptfile}
997 Use @var{scriptfile} as the default linker script. @xref{Scripts}.
998
999 This option is similar to the @option{--script} option except that
1000 processing of the script is delayed until after the rest of the
1001 command line has been processed. This allows options placed after the
1002 @option{--default-script} option on the command line to affect the
1003 behaviour of the linker script, which can be important when the linker
1004 command line cannot be directly controlled by the user. (eg because
1005 the command line is being constructed by another tool, such as
1006 @samp{gcc}).
1007
1008 @kindex -u @var{symbol}
1009 @kindex --undefined=@var{symbol}
1010 @cindex undefined symbol
1011 @item -u @var{symbol}
1012 @itemx --undefined=@var{symbol}
1013 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
1014 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
1015 modules from standard libraries. @samp{-u} may be repeated with
1016 different option arguments to enter additional undefined symbols. This
1017 option is equivalent to the @code{EXTERN} linker script command.
1018
1019 If this option is being used to force additional modules to be pulled
1020 into the link, and if it is an error for the symbol to remain
1021 undefined, then the option @option{--require-defined} should be used
1022 instead.
1023
1024 @kindex --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1025 @cindex symbols, require defined
1026 @cindex defined symbol
1027 @item --require-defined=@var{symbol}
1028 Require that @var{symbol} is defined in the output file. This option
1029 is the same as option @option{--undefined} except that if @var{symbol}
1030 is not defined in the output file then the linker will issue an error
1031 and exit. The same effect can be achieved in a linker script by using
1032 @code{EXTERN}, @code{ASSERT} and @code{DEFINED} together. This option
1033 can be used multiple times to require additional symbols.
1034
1035 @kindex -Ur
1036 @cindex constructors
1037 @item -Ur
1038 For anything other than C++ programs, this option is equivalent to
1039 @samp{-r}: it generates relocatable output---i.e., an output file that can in
1040 turn serve as input to @command{ld}. When linking C++ programs, @samp{-Ur}
1041 @emph{does} resolve references to constructors, unlike @samp{-r}.
1042 It does not work to use @samp{-Ur} on files that were themselves linked
1043 with @samp{-Ur}; once the constructor table has been built, it cannot
1044 be added to. Use @samp{-Ur} only for the last partial link, and
1045 @samp{-r} for the others.
1046
1047 @kindex --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1048 @cindex orphan sections
1049 @cindex sections, orphan
1050 @item --orphan-handling=@var{MODE}
1051 Control how orphan sections are handled. An orphan section is one not
1052 specifically mentioned in a linker script. @xref{Orphan Sections}.
1053
1054 @var{MODE} can have any of the following values:
1055
1056 @table @code
1057 @item place
1058 Orphan sections are placed into a suitable output section following
1059 the strategy described in @ref{Orphan Sections}. The option
1060 @samp{--unique} also affects how sections are placed.
1061
1062 @item discard
1063 All orphan sections are discarded, by placing them in the
1064 @samp{/DISCARD/} section (@pxref{Output Section Discarding}).
1065
1066 @item warn
1067 The linker will place the orphan section as for @code{place} and also
1068 issue a warning.
1069
1070 @item error
1071 The linker will exit with an error if any orphan section is found.
1072 @end table
1073
1074 The default if @samp{--orphan-handling} is not given is @code{place}.
1075
1076 @kindex --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1077 @item --unique[=@var{SECTION}]
1078 Creates a separate output section for every input section matching
1079 @var{SECTION}, or if the optional wildcard @var{SECTION} argument is
1080 missing, for every orphan input section. An orphan section is one not
1081 specifically mentioned in a linker script. You may use this option
1082 multiple times on the command line; It prevents the normal merging of
1083 input sections with the same name, overriding output section assignments
1084 in a linker script.
1085
1086 @kindex -v
1087 @kindex -V
1088 @kindex --version
1089 @cindex version
1090 @item -v
1091 @itemx --version
1092 @itemx -V
1093 Display the version number for @command{ld}. The @option{-V} option also
1094 lists the supported emulations.
1095
1096 @kindex -x
1097 @kindex --discard-all
1098 @cindex deleting local symbols
1099 @item -x
1100 @itemx --discard-all
1101 Delete all local symbols.
1102
1103 @kindex -X
1104 @kindex --discard-locals
1105 @cindex local symbols, deleting
1106 @item -X
1107 @itemx --discard-locals
1108 Delete all temporary local symbols. (These symbols start with
1109 system-specific local label prefixes, typically @samp{.L} for ELF systems
1110 or @samp{L} for traditional a.out systems.)
1111
1112 @kindex -y @var{symbol}
1113 @kindex --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1114 @cindex symbol tracing
1115 @item -y @var{symbol}
1116 @itemx --trace-symbol=@var{symbol}
1117 Print the name of each linked file in which @var{symbol} appears. This
1118 option may be given any number of times. On many systems it is necessary
1119 to prepend an underscore.
1120
1121 This option is useful when you have an undefined symbol in your link but
1122 don't know where the reference is coming from.
1123
1124 @kindex -Y @var{path}
1125 @item -Y @var{path}
1126 Add @var{path} to the default library search path. This option exists
1127 for Solaris compatibility.
1128
1129 @kindex -z @var{keyword}
1130 @item -z @var{keyword}
1131 The recognized keywords are:
1132 @table @samp
1133
1134 @item bndplt
1135 Always generate BND prefix in PLT entries. Supported for Linux/x86_64.
1136
1137 @item call-nop=prefix-addr
1138 @itemx call-nop=suffix-nop
1139 @itemx call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}
1140 @itemx call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}
1141 Specify the 1-byte @code{NOP} padding when transforming indirect call
1142 to a locally defined function, foo, via its GOT slot.
1143 @option{call-nop=prefix-addr} generates @code{0x67 call foo}.
1144 @option{call-nop=suffix-nop} generates @code{call foo 0x90}.
1145 @option{call-nop=prefix-@var{byte}} generates @code{@var{byte} call foo}.
1146 @option{call-nop=suffix-@var{byte}} generates @code{call foo @var{byte}}.
1147 Supported for i386 and x86_64.
1148
1149 @item cet-report=none
1150 @itemx cet-report=warning
1151 @itemx cet-report=error
1152 Specify how to report the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT and
1153 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK properties in input .note.gnu.property
1154 section. @option{cet-report=none}, which is the default, will make the
1155 linker not report missing properties in input files.
1156 @option{cet-report=warning} will make the linker issue a warning for
1157 missing properties in input files. @option{cet-report=error} will make
1158 the linker issue an error for missing properties in input files.
1159 Note that @option{ibt} will turn off the missing
1160 GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT property report and @option{shstk} will
1161 turn off the missing GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK property report.
1162 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1163
1164 @item combreloc
1165 @itemx nocombreloc
1166 Combine multiple dynamic relocation sections and sort to improve
1167 dynamic symbol lookup caching. Do not do this if @samp{nocombreloc}.
1168
1169 @item common
1170 @itemx nocommon
1171 Generate common symbols with STT_COMMON type during a relocatable
1172 link. Use STT_OBJECT type if @samp{nocommon}.
1173
1174 @item common-page-size=@var{value}
1175 Set the page size most commonly used to @var{value}. Memory image
1176 layout will be optimized to minimize memory pages if the system is
1177 using pages of this size.
1178
1179 @item defs
1180 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1181 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1182 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z undefs}.
1183
1184 @item dynamic-undefined-weak
1185 @itemx nodynamic-undefined-weak
1186 Make undefined weak symbols dynamic when building a dynamic object,
1187 if they are referenced from a regular object file and not forced local
1188 by symbol visibility or versioning. Do not make them dynamic if
1189 @samp{nodynamic-undefined-weak}. If neither option is given, a target
1190 may default to either option being in force, or make some other
1191 selection of undefined weak symbols dynamic. Not all targets support
1192 these options.
1193
1194 @item execstack
1195 Marks the object as requiring executable stack.
1196
1197 @item global
1198 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object. It makes
1199 the symbols defined by this shared object available for symbol resolution
1200 of subsequently loaded libraries.
1201
1202 @item globalaudit
1203 This option is only meaningful when building a dynamic executable.
1204 This option marks the executable as requiring global auditing by
1205 setting the @code{DF_1_GLOBAUDIT} bit in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} dynamic
1206 tag. Global auditing requires that any auditing library defined via
1207 the @option{--depaudit} or @option{-P} command-line options be run for
1208 all dynamic objects loaded by the application.
1209
1210 @item ibtplt
1211 Generate Intel Indirect Branch Tracking (IBT) enabled PLT entries.
1212 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1213
1214 @item ibt
1215 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_IBT in .note.gnu.property section
1216 to indicate compatibility with IBT. This also implies @option{ibtplt}.
1217 Supported for Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1218
1219 @item initfirst
1220 This option is only meaningful when building a shared object.
1221 It marks the object so that its runtime initialization will occur
1222 before the runtime initialization of any other objects brought into
1223 the process at the same time. Similarly the runtime finalization of
1224 the object will occur after the runtime finalization of any other
1225 objects.
1226
1227 @item interpose
1228 Specify that the dynamic loader should modify its symbol search order
1229 so that symbols in this shared library interpose all other shared
1230 libraries not so marked.
1231
1232 @item lazy
1233 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1234 dynamic linker to defer function call resolution to the point when
1235 the function is called (lazy binding), rather than at load time.
1236 Lazy binding is the default.
1237
1238 @item loadfltr
1239 Specify that the object's filters be processed immediately at runtime.
1240
1241 @item max-page-size=@var{value}
1242 Set the maximum memory page size supported to @var{value}.
1243
1244 @item muldefs
1245 Allow multiple definitions.
1246
1247 @item nocopyreloc
1248 Disable linker generated .dynbss variables used in place of variables
1249 defined in shared libraries. May result in dynamic text relocations.
1250
1251 @item nodefaultlib
1252 Specify that the dynamic loader search for dependencies of this object
1253 should ignore any default library search paths.
1254
1255 @item nodelete
1256 Specify that the object shouldn't be unloaded at runtime.
1257
1258 @item nodlopen
1259 Specify that the object is not available to @code{dlopen}.
1260
1261 @item nodump
1262 Specify that the object can not be dumped by @code{dldump}.
1263
1264 @item noexecstack
1265 Marks the object as not requiring executable stack.
1266
1267 @item noextern-protected-data
1268 Don't treat protected data symbols as external when building a shared
1269 library. This option overrides the linker backend default. It can be
1270 used to work around incorrect relocations against protected data symbols
1271 generated by compiler. Updates on protected data symbols by another
1272 module aren't visible to the resulting shared library. Supported for
1273 i386 and x86-64.
1274
1275 @item noreloc-overflow
1276 Disable relocation overflow check. This can be used to disable
1277 relocation overflow check if there will be no dynamic relocation
1278 overflow at run-time. Supported for x86_64.
1279
1280 @item now
1281 When generating an executable or shared library, mark it to tell the
1282 dynamic linker to resolve all symbols when the program is started, or
1283 when the shared library is loaded by dlopen, instead of deferring
1284 function call resolution to the point when the function is first
1285 called.
1286
1287 @item origin
1288 Specify that the object requires @samp{$ORIGIN} handling in paths.
1289
1290 @item relro
1291 @itemx norelro
1292 Create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment header in the object. This
1293 specifies a memory segment that should be made read-only after
1294 relocation, if supported. Specifying @samp{common-page-size} smaller
1295 than the system page size will render this protection ineffective.
1296 Don't create an ELF @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment if @samp{norelro}.
1297
1298 @item separate-code
1299 @itemx noseparate-code
1300 Create separate code @code{PT_LOAD} segment header in the object. This
1301 specifies a memory segment that should contain only instructions and must
1302 be in wholly disjoint pages from any other data. Don't create separate
1303 code @code{PT_LOAD} segment if @samp{noseparate-code} is used.
1304
1305 @item shstk
1306 Generate GNU_PROPERTY_X86_FEATURE_1_SHSTK in .note.gnu.property section
1307 to indicate compatibility with Intel Shadow Stack. Supported for
1308 Linux/i386 and Linux/x86_64.
1309
1310 @item stack-size=@var{value}
1311 Specify a stack size for an ELF @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment.
1312 Specifying zero will override any default non-zero sized
1313 @code{PT_GNU_STACK} segment creation.
1314
1315 @item text
1316 @itemx notext
1317 @itemx textoff
1318 Report an error if DT_TEXTREL is set, i.e., if the binary has dynamic
1319 relocations in read-only sections. Don't report an error if
1320 @samp{notext} or @samp{textoff}.
1321
1322 @item undefs
1323 Do not report unresolved symbol references from regular object files,
1324 either when creating an executable, or when creating a shared library.
1325 This option is the inverse of @samp{-z defs}.
1326
1327 @end table
1328
1329 Other keywords are ignored for Solaris compatibility.
1330
1331 @kindex -(
1332 @cindex groups of archives
1333 @item -( @var{archives} -)
1334 @itemx --start-group @var{archives} --end-group
1335 The @var{archives} should be a list of archive files. They may be
1336 either explicit file names, or @samp{-l} options.
1337
1338 The specified archives are searched repeatedly until no new undefined
1339 references are created. Normally, an archive is searched only once in
1340 the order that it is specified on the command line. If a symbol in that
1341 archive is needed to resolve an undefined symbol referred to by an
1342 object in an archive that appears later on the command line, the linker
1343 would not be able to resolve that reference. By grouping the archives,
1344 they will all be searched repeatedly until all possible references are
1345 resolved.
1346
1347 Using this option has a significant performance cost. It is best to use
1348 it only when there are unavoidable circular references between two or
1349 more archives.
1350
1351 @kindex --accept-unknown-input-arch
1352 @kindex --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1353 @item --accept-unknown-input-arch
1354 @itemx --no-accept-unknown-input-arch
1355 Tells the linker to accept input files whose architecture cannot be
1356 recognised. The assumption is that the user knows what they are doing
1357 and deliberately wants to link in these unknown input files. This was
1358 the default behaviour of the linker, before release 2.14. The default
1359 behaviour from release 2.14 onwards is to reject such input files, and
1360 so the @samp{--accept-unknown-input-arch} option has been added to
1361 restore the old behaviour.
1362
1363 @kindex --as-needed
1364 @kindex --no-as-needed
1365 @item --as-needed
1366 @itemx --no-as-needed
1367 This option affects ELF DT_NEEDED tags for dynamic libraries mentioned
1368 on the command line after the @option{--as-needed} option. Normally
1369 the linker will add a DT_NEEDED tag for each dynamic library mentioned
1370 on the command line, regardless of whether the library is actually
1371 needed or not. @option{--as-needed} causes a DT_NEEDED tag to only be
1372 emitted for a library that @emph{at that point in the link} satisfies a
1373 non-weak undefined symbol reference from a regular object file or, if
1374 the library is not found in the DT_NEEDED lists of other needed libraries, a
1375 non-weak undefined symbol reference from another needed dynamic library.
1376 Object files or libraries appearing on the command line @emph{after}
1377 the library in question do not affect whether the library is seen as
1378 needed. This is similar to the rules for extraction of object files
1379 from archives. @option{--no-as-needed} restores the default behaviour.
1380
1381 @kindex --add-needed
1382 @kindex --no-add-needed
1383 @item --add-needed
1384 @itemx --no-add-needed
1385 These two options have been deprecated because of the similarity of
1386 their names to the @option{--as-needed} and @option{--no-as-needed}
1387 options. They have been replaced by @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1388 and @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1389
1390 @kindex -assert @var{keyword}
1391 @item -assert @var{keyword}
1392 This option is ignored for SunOS compatibility.
1393
1394 @kindex -Bdynamic
1395 @kindex -dy
1396 @kindex -call_shared
1397 @item -Bdynamic
1398 @itemx -dy
1399 @itemx -call_shared
1400 Link against dynamic libraries. This is only meaningful on platforms
1401 for which shared libraries are supported. This option is normally the
1402 default on such platforms. The different variants of this option are
1403 for compatibility with various systems. You may use this option
1404 multiple times on the command line: it affects library searching for
1405 @option{-l} options which follow it.
1406
1407 @kindex -Bgroup
1408 @item -Bgroup
1409 Set the @code{DF_1_GROUP} flag in the @code{DT_FLAGS_1} entry in the dynamic
1410 section. This causes the runtime linker to handle lookups in this
1411 object and its dependencies to be performed only inside the group.
1412 @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all} is implied. This option is
1413 only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared libraries.
1414
1415 @kindex -Bstatic
1416 @kindex -dn
1417 @kindex -non_shared
1418 @kindex -static
1419 @item -Bstatic
1420 @itemx -dn
1421 @itemx -non_shared
1422 @itemx -static
1423 Do not link against shared libraries. This is only meaningful on
1424 platforms for which shared libraries are supported. The different
1425 variants of this option are for compatibility with various systems. You
1426 may use this option multiple times on the command line: it affects
1427 library searching for @option{-l} options which follow it. This
1428 option also implies @option{--unresolved-symbols=report-all}. This
1429 option can be used with @option{-shared}. Doing so means that a
1430 shared library is being created but that all of the library's external
1431 references must be resolved by pulling in entries from static
1432 libraries.
1433
1434 @kindex -Bsymbolic
1435 @item -Bsymbolic
1436 When creating a shared library, bind references to global symbols to the
1437 definition within the shared library, if any. Normally, it is possible
1438 for a program linked against a shared library to override the definition
1439 within the shared library. This option is only meaningful on ELF
1440 platforms which support shared libraries.
1441
1442 @kindex -Bsymbolic-functions
1443 @item -Bsymbolic-functions
1444 When creating a shared library, bind references to global function
1445 symbols to the definition within the shared library, if any.
1446 This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms which support shared
1447 libraries.
1448
1449 @kindex --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1450 @item --dynamic-list=@var{dynamic-list-file}
1451 Specify the name of a dynamic list file to the linker. This is
1452 typically used when creating shared libraries to specify a list of
1453 global symbols whose references shouldn't be bound to the definition
1454 within the shared library, or creating dynamically linked executables
1455 to specify a list of symbols which should be added to the symbol table
1456 in the executable. This option is only meaningful on ELF platforms
1457 which support shared libraries.
1458
1459 The format of the dynamic list is the same as the version node without
1460 scope and node name. See @ref{VERSION} for more information.
1461
1462 @kindex --dynamic-list-data
1463 @item --dynamic-list-data
1464 Include all global data symbols to the dynamic list.
1465
1466 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1467 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-new
1468 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ operator new and delete. It
1469 is mainly useful for building shared libstdc++.
1470
1471 @kindex --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1472 @item --dynamic-list-cpp-typeinfo
1473 Provide the builtin dynamic list for C++ runtime type identification.
1474
1475 @kindex --check-sections
1476 @kindex --no-check-sections
1477 @item --check-sections
1478 @itemx --no-check-sections
1479 Asks the linker @emph{not} to check section addresses after they have
1480 been assigned to see if there are any overlaps. Normally the linker will
1481 perform this check, and if it finds any overlaps it will produce
1482 suitable error messages. The linker does know about, and does make
1483 allowances for sections in overlays. The default behaviour can be
1484 restored by using the command-line switch @option{--check-sections}.
1485 Section overlap is not usually checked for relocatable links. You can
1486 force checking in that case by using the @option{--check-sections}
1487 option.
1488
1489 @kindex --copy-dt-needed-entries
1490 @kindex --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1491 @item --copy-dt-needed-entries
1492 @itemx --no-copy-dt-needed-entries
1493 This option affects the treatment of dynamic libraries referred to
1494 by DT_NEEDED tags @emph{inside} ELF dynamic libraries mentioned on the
1495 command line. Normally the linker won't add a DT_NEEDED tag to the
1496 output binary for each library mentioned in a DT_NEEDED tag in an
1497 input dynamic library. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries}
1498 specified on the command line however any dynamic libraries that
1499 follow it will have their DT_NEEDED entries added. The default
1500 behaviour can be restored with @option{--no-copy-dt-needed-entries}.
1501
1502 This option also has an effect on the resolution of symbols in dynamic
1503 libraries. With @option{--copy-dt-needed-entries} dynamic libraries
1504 mentioned on the command line will be recursively searched, following
1505 their DT_NEEDED tags to other libraries, in order to resolve symbols
1506 required by the output binary. With the default setting however
1507 the searching of dynamic libraries that follow it will stop with the
1508 dynamic library itself. No DT_NEEDED links will be traversed to resolve
1509 symbols.
1510
1511 @cindex cross reference table
1512 @kindex --cref
1513 @item --cref
1514 Output a cross reference table. If a linker map file is being
1515 generated, the cross reference table is printed to the map file.
1516 Otherwise, it is printed on the standard output.
1517
1518 The format of the table is intentionally simple, so that it may be
1519 easily processed by a script if necessary. The symbols are printed out,
1520 sorted by name. For each symbol, a list of file names is given. If the
1521 symbol is defined, the first file listed is the location of the
1522 definition. If the symbol is defined as a common value then any files
1523 where this happens appear next. Finally any files that reference the
1524 symbol are listed.
1525
1526 @cindex common allocation
1527 @kindex --no-define-common
1528 @item --no-define-common
1529 This option inhibits the assignment of addresses to common symbols.
1530 The script command @code{INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION} has the same effect.
1531 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1532
1533 The @samp{--no-define-common} option allows decoupling
1534 the decision to assign addresses to Common symbols from the choice
1535 of the output file type; otherwise a non-Relocatable output type
1536 forces assigning addresses to Common symbols.
1537 Using @samp{--no-define-common} allows Common symbols that are referenced
1538 from a shared library to be assigned addresses only in the main program.
1539 This eliminates the unused duplicate space in the shared library,
1540 and also prevents any possible confusion over resolving to the wrong
1541 duplicate when there are many dynamic modules with specialized search
1542 paths for runtime symbol resolution.
1543
1544 @cindex group allocation in linker script
1545 @cindex section groups
1546 @cindex COMDAT
1547 @kindex --force-group-allocation
1548 @item --force-group-allocation
1549 This option causes the linker to place section group members like
1550 normal input sections, and to delete the section groups. This is the
1551 default behaviour for a final link but this option can be used to
1552 change the behaviour of a relocatable link (@samp{-r}). The script
1553 command @code{FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION} has the same
1554 effect. @xref{Miscellaneous Commands}.
1555
1556 @cindex symbols, from command line
1557 @kindex --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{exp}
1558 @item --defsym=@var{symbol}=@var{expression}
1559 Create a global symbol in the output file, containing the absolute
1560 address given by @var{expression}. You may use this option as many
1561 times as necessary to define multiple symbols in the command line. A
1562 limited form of arithmetic is supported for the @var{expression} in this
1563 context: you may give a hexadecimal constant or the name of an existing
1564 symbol, or use @code{+} and @code{-} to add or subtract hexadecimal
1565 constants or symbols. If you need more elaborate expressions, consider
1566 using the linker command language from a script (@pxref{Assignments}).
1567 @emph{Note:} there should be no white space between @var{symbol}, the
1568 equals sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{expression}.
1569
1570 @cindex demangling, from command line
1571 @kindex --demangle[=@var{style}]
1572 @kindex --no-demangle
1573 @item --demangle[=@var{style}]
1574 @itemx --no-demangle
1575 These options control whether to demangle symbol names in error messages
1576 and other output. When the linker is told to demangle, it tries to
1577 present symbol names in a readable fashion: it strips leading
1578 underscores if they are used by the object file format, and converts C++
1579 mangled symbol names into user readable names. Different compilers have
1580 different mangling styles. The optional demangling style argument can be used
1581 to choose an appropriate demangling style for your compiler. The linker will
1582 demangle by default unless the environment variable @samp{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}
1583 is set. These options may be used to override the default.
1584
1585 @cindex dynamic linker, from command line
1586 @kindex -I@var{file}
1587 @kindex --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1588 @item -I@var{file}
1589 @itemx --dynamic-linker=@var{file}
1590 Set the name of the dynamic linker. This is only meaningful when
1591 generating dynamically linked ELF executables. The default dynamic
1592 linker is normally correct; don't use this unless you know what you are
1593 doing.
1594
1595 @kindex --no-dynamic-linker
1596 @item --no-dynamic-linker
1597 When producing an executable file, omit the request for a dynamic
1598 linker to be used at load-time. This is only meaningful for ELF
1599 executables that contain dynamic relocations, and usually requires
1600 entry point code that is capable of processing these relocations.
1601
1602 @kindex --embedded-relocs
1603 @item --embedded-relocs
1604 This option is similar to the @option{--emit-relocs} option except
1605 that the relocs are stored in a target-specific section. This option
1606 is only supported by the @samp{BFIN}, @samp{CR16} and @emph{M68K}
1607 targets.
1608
1609 @kindex --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1610 @item --disable-multiple-abs-defs
1611 Do not allow multiple definitions with symbols included
1612 in filename invoked by -R or --just-symbols
1613
1614 @kindex --fatal-warnings
1615 @kindex --no-fatal-warnings
1616 @item --fatal-warnings
1617 @itemx --no-fatal-warnings
1618 Treat all warnings as errors. The default behaviour can be restored
1619 with the option @option{--no-fatal-warnings}.
1620
1621 @kindex --force-exe-suffix
1622 @item --force-exe-suffix
1623 Make sure that an output file has a .exe suffix.
1624
1625 If a successfully built fully linked output file does not have a
1626 @code{.exe} or @code{.dll} suffix, this option forces the linker to copy
1627 the output file to one of the same name with a @code{.exe} suffix. This
1628 option is useful when using unmodified Unix makefiles on a Microsoft
1629 Windows host, since some versions of Windows won't run an image unless
1630 it ends in a @code{.exe} suffix.
1631
1632 @kindex --gc-sections
1633 @kindex --no-gc-sections
1634 @cindex garbage collection
1635 @item --gc-sections
1636 @itemx --no-gc-sections
1637 Enable garbage collection of unused input sections. It is ignored on
1638 targets that do not support this option. The default behaviour (of not
1639 performing this garbage collection) can be restored by specifying
1640 @samp{--no-gc-sections} on the command line. Note that garbage
1641 collection for COFF and PE format targets is supported, but the
1642 implementation is currently considered to be experimental.
1643
1644 @samp{--gc-sections} decides which input sections are used by
1645 examining symbols and relocations. The section containing the entry
1646 symbol and all sections containing symbols undefined on the
1647 command-line will be kept, as will sections containing symbols
1648 referenced by dynamic objects. Note that when building shared
1649 libraries, the linker must assume that any visible symbol is
1650 referenced. Once this initial set of sections has been determined,
1651 the linker recursively marks as used any section referenced by their
1652 relocations. See @samp{--entry}, @samp{--undefined}, and
1653 @samp{--gc-keep-exported}.
1654
1655 This option can be set when doing a partial link (enabled with option
1656 @samp{-r}). In this case the root of symbols kept must be explicitly
1657 specified either by one of the options @samp{--entry},
1658 @samp{--undefined}, or @samp{--gc-keep-exported} or by a @code{ENTRY}
1659 command in the linker script.
1660
1661 @kindex --print-gc-sections
1662 @kindex --no-print-gc-sections
1663 @cindex garbage collection
1664 @item --print-gc-sections
1665 @itemx --no-print-gc-sections
1666 List all sections removed by garbage collection. The listing is
1667 printed on stderr. This option is only effective if garbage
1668 collection has been enabled via the @samp{--gc-sections}) option. The
1669 default behaviour (of not listing the sections that are removed) can
1670 be restored by specifying @samp{--no-print-gc-sections} on the command
1671 line.
1672
1673 @kindex --gc-keep-exported
1674 @cindex garbage collection
1675 @item --gc-keep-exported
1676 When @samp{--gc-sections} is enabled, this option prevents garbage
1677 collection of unused input sections that contain global symbols having
1678 default or protected visibility. This option is intended to be used for
1679 executables where unreferenced sections would otherwise be garbage
1680 collected regardless of the external visibility of contained symbols.
1681 Note that this option has no effect when linking shared objects since
1682 it is already the default behaviour. This option is only supported for
1683 ELF format targets.
1684
1685 @kindex --print-output-format
1686 @cindex output format
1687 @item --print-output-format
1688 Print the name of the default output format (perhaps influenced by
1689 other command-line options). This is the string that would appear
1690 in an @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} linker script command (@pxref{File Commands}).
1691
1692 @kindex --print-memory-usage
1693 @cindex memory usage
1694 @item --print-memory-usage
1695 Print used size, total size and used size of memory regions created with
1696 the @ref{MEMORY} command. This is useful on embedded targets to have a
1697 quick view of amount of free memory. The format of the output has one
1698 headline and one line per region. It is both human readable and easily
1699 parsable by tools. Here is an example of an output:
1700
1701 @smallexample
1702 Memory region Used Size Region Size %age Used
1703 ROM: 256 KB 1 MB 25.00%
1704 RAM: 32 B 2 GB 0.00%
1705 @end smallexample
1706
1707 @cindex help
1708 @cindex usage
1709 @kindex --help
1710 @item --help
1711 Print a summary of the command-line options on the standard output and exit.
1712
1713 @kindex --target-help
1714 @item --target-help
1715 Print a summary of all target-specific options on the standard output and exit.
1716
1717 @kindex -Map=@var{mapfile}
1718 @item -Map=@var{mapfile}
1719 Print a link map to the file @var{mapfile}. See the description of the
1720 @option{-M} option, above.
1721
1722 @cindex memory usage
1723 @kindex --no-keep-memory
1724 @item --no-keep-memory
1725 @command{ld} normally optimizes for speed over memory usage by caching the
1726 symbol tables of input files in memory. This option tells @command{ld} to
1727 instead optimize for memory usage, by rereading the symbol tables as
1728 necessary. This may be required if @command{ld} runs out of memory space
1729 while linking a large executable.
1730
1731 @kindex --no-undefined
1732 @kindex -z defs
1733 @kindex -z undefs
1734 @item --no-undefined
1735 @itemx -z defs
1736 Report unresolved symbol references from regular object files. This
1737 is done even if the linker is creating a non-symbolic shared library.
1738 The switch @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} controls the
1739 behaviour for reporting unresolved references found in shared
1740 libraries being linked in.
1741
1742 The effects of this option can be reverted by using @code{-z undefs}.
1743
1744 @kindex --allow-multiple-definition
1745 @kindex -z muldefs
1746 @item --allow-multiple-definition
1747 @itemx -z muldefs
1748 Normally when a symbol is defined multiple times, the linker will
1749 report a fatal error. These options allow multiple definitions and the
1750 first definition will be used.
1751
1752 @kindex --allow-shlib-undefined
1753 @kindex --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1754 @item --allow-shlib-undefined
1755 @itemx --no-allow-shlib-undefined
1756 Allows or disallows undefined symbols in shared libraries.
1757 This switch is similar to @option{--no-undefined} except that it
1758 determines the behaviour when the undefined symbols are in a
1759 shared library rather than a regular object file. It does not affect
1760 how undefined symbols in regular object files are handled.
1761
1762 The default behaviour is to report errors for any undefined symbols
1763 referenced in shared libraries if the linker is being used to create
1764 an executable, but to allow them if the linker is being used to create
1765 a shared library.
1766
1767 The reasons for allowing undefined symbol references in shared
1768 libraries specified at link time are that:
1769
1770 @itemize @bullet
1771 @item
1772 A shared library specified at link time may not be the same as the one
1773 that is available at load time, so the symbol might actually be
1774 resolvable at load time.
1775 @item
1776 There are some operating systems, eg BeOS and HPPA, where undefined
1777 symbols in shared libraries are normal.
1778
1779 The BeOS kernel for example patches shared libraries at load time to
1780 select whichever function is most appropriate for the current
1781 architecture. This is used, for example, to dynamically select an
1782 appropriate memset function.
1783 @end itemize
1784
1785 @kindex --no-undefined-version
1786 @item --no-undefined-version
1787 Normally when a symbol has an undefined version, the linker will ignore
1788 it. This option disallows symbols with undefined version and a fatal error
1789 will be issued instead.
1790
1791 @kindex --default-symver
1792 @item --default-symver
1793 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1794 exported symbols.
1795
1796 @kindex --default-imported-symver
1797 @item --default-imported-symver
1798 Create and use a default symbol version (the soname) for unversioned
1799 imported symbols.
1800
1801 @kindex --no-warn-mismatch
1802 @item --no-warn-mismatch
1803 Normally @command{ld} will give an error if you try to link together input
1804 files that are mismatched for some reason, perhaps because they have
1805 been compiled for different processors or for different endiannesses.
1806 This option tells @command{ld} that it should silently permit such possible
1807 errors. This option should only be used with care, in cases when you
1808 have taken some special action that ensures that the linker errors are
1809 inappropriate.
1810
1811 @kindex --no-warn-search-mismatch
1812 @item --no-warn-search-mismatch
1813 Normally @command{ld} will give a warning if it finds an incompatible
1814 library during a library search. This option silences the warning.
1815
1816 @kindex --no-whole-archive
1817 @item --no-whole-archive
1818 Turn off the effect of the @option{--whole-archive} option for subsequent
1819 archive files.
1820
1821 @cindex output file after errors
1822 @kindex --noinhibit-exec
1823 @item --noinhibit-exec
1824 Retain the executable output file whenever it is still usable.
1825 Normally, the linker will not produce an output file if it encounters
1826 errors during the link process; it exits without writing an output file
1827 when it issues any error whatsoever.
1828
1829 @kindex -nostdlib
1830 @item -nostdlib
1831 Only search library directories explicitly specified on the
1832 command line. Library directories specified in linker scripts
1833 (including linker scripts specified on the command line) are ignored.
1834
1835 @ifclear SingleFormat
1836 @kindex --oformat=@var{output-format}
1837 @item --oformat=@var{output-format}
1838 @command{ld} may be configured to support more than one kind of object
1839 file. If your @command{ld} is configured this way, you can use the
1840 @samp{--oformat} option to specify the binary format for the output
1841 object file. Even when @command{ld} is configured to support alternative
1842 object formats, you don't usually need to specify this, as @command{ld}
1843 should be configured to produce as a default output format the most
1844 usual format on each machine. @var{output-format} is a text string, the
1845 name of a particular format supported by the BFD libraries. (You can
1846 list the available binary formats with @samp{objdump -i}.) The script
1847 command @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} can also specify the output format, but
1848 this option overrides it. @xref{BFD}.
1849 @end ifclear
1850
1851 @kindex --out-implib
1852 @item --out-implib @var{file}
1853 Create an import library in @var{file} corresponding to the executable
1854 the linker is generating (eg. a DLL or ELF program). This import
1855 library (which should be called @code{*.dll.a} or @code{*.a} for DLLs)
1856 may be used to link clients against the generated executable; this
1857 behaviour makes it possible to skip a separate import library creation
1858 step (eg. @code{dlltool} for DLLs). This option is only available for
1859 the i386 PE and ELF targetted ports of the linker.
1860
1861 @kindex -pie
1862 @kindex --pic-executable
1863 @item -pie
1864 @itemx --pic-executable
1865 @cindex position independent executables
1866 Create a position independent executable. This is currently only supported on
1867 ELF platforms. Position independent executables are similar to shared
1868 libraries in that they are relocated by the dynamic linker to the virtual
1869 address the OS chooses for them (which can vary between invocations). Like
1870 normal dynamically linked executables they can be executed and symbols
1871 defined in the executable cannot be overridden by shared libraries.
1872
1873 @kindex -qmagic
1874 @item -qmagic
1875 This option is ignored for Linux compatibility.
1876
1877 @kindex -Qy
1878 @item -Qy
1879 This option is ignored for SVR4 compatibility.
1880
1881 @kindex --relax
1882 @cindex synthesizing linker
1883 @cindex relaxing addressing modes
1884 @cindex --no-relax
1885 @item --relax
1886 @itemx --no-relax
1887 An option with machine dependent effects.
1888 @ifset GENERIC
1889 This option is only supported on a few targets.
1890 @end ifset
1891 @ifset H8300
1892 @xref{H8/300,,@command{ld} and the H8/300}.
1893 @end ifset
1894 @ifset XTENSA
1895 @xref{Xtensa,, @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors}.
1896 @end ifset
1897 @ifset M68HC11
1898 @xref{M68HC11/68HC12,,@command{ld} and the 68HC11 and 68HC12}.
1899 @end ifset
1900 @ifset NIOSII
1901 @xref{Nios II,,@command{ld} and the Altera Nios II}.
1902 @end ifset
1903 @ifset POWERPC
1904 @xref{PowerPC ELF32,,@command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support}.
1905 @end ifset
1906
1907 On some platforms the @samp{--relax} option performs target-specific,
1908 global optimizations that become possible when the linker resolves
1909 addressing in the program, such as relaxing address modes,
1910 synthesizing new instructions, selecting shorter version of current
1911 instructions, and combining constant values.
1912
1913 On some platforms these link time global optimizations may make symbolic
1914 debugging of the resulting executable impossible.
1915 @ifset GENERIC
1916 This is known to be the case for the Matsushita MN10200 and MN10300
1917 family of processors.
1918 @end ifset
1919
1920 @ifset GENERIC
1921 On platforms where this is not supported, @samp{--relax} is accepted,
1922 but ignored.
1923 @end ifset
1924
1925 On platforms where @samp{--relax} is accepted the option
1926 @samp{--no-relax} can be used to disable the feature.
1927
1928 @cindex retaining specified symbols
1929 @cindex stripping all but some symbols
1930 @cindex symbols, retaining selectively
1931 @kindex --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1932 @item --retain-symbols-file=@var{filename}
1933 Retain @emph{only} the symbols listed in the file @var{filename},
1934 discarding all others. @var{filename} is simply a flat file, with one
1935 symbol name per line. This option is especially useful in environments
1936 @ifset GENERIC
1937 (such as VxWorks)
1938 @end ifset
1939 where a large global symbol table is accumulated gradually, to conserve
1940 run-time memory.
1941
1942 @samp{--retain-symbols-file} does @emph{not} discard undefined symbols,
1943 or symbols needed for relocations.
1944
1945 You may only specify @samp{--retain-symbols-file} once in the command
1946 line. It overrides @samp{-s} and @samp{-S}.
1947
1948 @ifset GENERIC
1949 @item -rpath=@var{dir}
1950 @cindex runtime library search path
1951 @kindex -rpath=@var{dir}
1952 Add a directory to the runtime library search path. This is used when
1953 linking an ELF executable with shared objects. All @option{-rpath}
1954 arguments are concatenated and passed to the runtime linker, which uses
1955 them to locate shared objects at runtime.
1956
1957 The @option{-rpath} option is also used when locating shared objects which
1958 are needed by shared objects explicitly included in the link; see the
1959 description of the @option{-rpath-link} option. Searching @option{-rpath}
1960 in this way is only supported by native linkers and cross linkers which
1961 have been configured with the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
1962
1963 If @option{-rpath} is not used when linking an ELF executable, the
1964 contents of the environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH} will be used if it
1965 is defined.
1966
1967 The @option{-rpath} option may also be used on SunOS. By default, on
1968 SunOS, the linker will form a runtime search path out of all the
1969 @option{-L} options it is given. If a @option{-rpath} option is used, the
1970 runtime search path will be formed exclusively using the @option{-rpath}
1971 options, ignoring the @option{-L} options. This can be useful when using
1972 gcc, which adds many @option{-L} options which may be on NFS mounted
1973 file systems.
1974
1975 For compatibility with other ELF linkers, if the @option{-R} option is
1976 followed by a directory name, rather than a file name, it is treated as
1977 the @option{-rpath} option.
1978 @end ifset
1979
1980 @ifset GENERIC
1981 @cindex link-time runtime library search path
1982 @kindex -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1983 @item -rpath-link=@var{dir}
1984 When using ELF or SunOS, one shared library may require another. This
1985 happens when an @code{ld -shared} link includes a shared library as one
1986 of the input files.
1987
1988 When the linker encounters such a dependency when doing a non-shared,
1989 non-relocatable link, it will automatically try to locate the required
1990 shared library and include it in the link, if it is not included
1991 explicitly. In such a case, the @option{-rpath-link} option
1992 specifies the first set of directories to search. The
1993 @option{-rpath-link} option may specify a sequence of directory names
1994 either by specifying a list of names separated by colons, or by
1995 appearing multiple times.
1996
1997 The tokens @var{$ORIGIN} and @var{$LIB} can appear in these search
1998 directories. They will be replaced by the full path to the directory
1999 containing the program or shared object in the case of @var{$ORIGIN}
2000 and either @samp{lib} - for 32-bit binaries - or @samp{lib64} - for
2001 64-bit binaries - in the case of @var{$LIB}.
2002
2003 The alternative form of these tokens - @var{$@{ORIGIN@}} and
2004 @var{$@{LIB@}} can also be used. The token @var{$PLATFORM} is not
2005 supported.
2006
2007 This option should be used with caution as it overrides the search path
2008 that may have been hard compiled into a shared library. In such a case it
2009 is possible to use unintentionally a different search path than the
2010 runtime linker would do.
2011
2012 The linker uses the following search paths to locate required shared
2013 libraries:
2014 @enumerate
2015 @item
2016 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath-link} options.
2017 @item
2018 Any directories specified by @option{-rpath} options. The difference
2019 between @option{-rpath} and @option{-rpath-link} is that directories
2020 specified by @option{-rpath} options are included in the executable and
2021 used at runtime, whereas the @option{-rpath-link} option is only effective
2022 at link time. Searching @option{-rpath} in this way is only supported
2023 by native linkers and cross linkers which have been configured with
2024 the @option{--with-sysroot} option.
2025 @item
2026 On an ELF system, for native linkers, if the @option{-rpath} and
2027 @option{-rpath-link} options were not used, search the contents of the
2028 environment variable @code{LD_RUN_PATH}.
2029 @item
2030 On SunOS, if the @option{-rpath} option was not used, search any
2031 directories specified using @option{-L} options.
2032 @item
2033 For a native linker, search the contents of the environment
2034 variable @code{LD_LIBRARY_PATH}.
2035 @item
2036 For a native ELF linker, the directories in @code{DT_RUNPATH} or
2037 @code{DT_RPATH} of a shared library are searched for shared
2038 libraries needed by it. The @code{DT_RPATH} entries are ignored if
2039 @code{DT_RUNPATH} entries exist.
2040 @item
2041 The default directories, normally @file{/lib} and @file{/usr/lib}.
2042 @item
2043 For a native linker on an ELF system, if the file @file{/etc/ld.so.conf}
2044 exists, the list of directories found in that file.
2045 @end enumerate
2046
2047 If the required shared library is not found, the linker will issue a
2048 warning and continue with the link.
2049 @end ifset
2050
2051 @kindex -shared
2052 @kindex -Bshareable
2053 @item -shared
2054 @itemx -Bshareable
2055 @cindex shared libraries
2056 Create a shared library. This is currently only supported on ELF, XCOFF
2057 and SunOS platforms. On SunOS, the linker will automatically create a
2058 shared library if the @option{-e} option is not used and there are
2059 undefined symbols in the link.
2060
2061 @kindex --sort-common
2062 @item --sort-common
2063 @itemx --sort-common=ascending
2064 @itemx --sort-common=descending
2065 This option tells @command{ld} to sort the common symbols by alignment in
2066 ascending or descending order when it places them in the appropriate output
2067 sections. The symbol alignments considered are sixteen-byte or larger,
2068 eight-byte, four-byte, two-byte, and one-byte. This is to prevent gaps
2069 between symbols due to alignment constraints. If no sorting order is
2070 specified, then descending order is assumed.
2071
2072 @kindex --sort-section=name
2073 @item --sort-section=name
2074 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_NAME} to all wildcard section
2075 patterns in the linker script.
2076
2077 @kindex --sort-section=alignment
2078 @item --sort-section=alignment
2079 This option will apply @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} to all wildcard section
2080 patterns in the linker script.
2081
2082 @kindex --spare-dynamic-tags
2083 @item --spare-dynamic-tags=@var{count}
2084 This option specifies the number of empty slots to leave in the
2085 .dynamic section of ELF shared objects. Empty slots may be needed by
2086 post processing tools, such as the prelinker. The default is 5.
2087
2088 @kindex --split-by-file
2089 @item --split-by-file[=@var{size}]
2090 Similar to @option{--split-by-reloc} but creates a new output section for
2091 each input file when @var{size} is reached. @var{size} defaults to a
2092 size of 1 if not given.
2093
2094 @kindex --split-by-reloc
2095 @item --split-by-reloc[=@var{count}]
2096 Tries to creates extra sections in the output file so that no single
2097 output section in the file contains more than @var{count} relocations.
2098 This is useful when generating huge relocatable files for downloading into
2099 certain real time kernels with the COFF object file format; since COFF
2100 cannot represent more than 65535 relocations in a single section. Note
2101 that this will fail to work with object file formats which do not
2102 support arbitrary sections. The linker will not split up individual
2103 input sections for redistribution, so if a single input section contains
2104 more than @var{count} relocations one output section will contain that
2105 many relocations. @var{count} defaults to a value of 32768.
2106
2107 @kindex --stats
2108 @item --stats
2109 Compute and display statistics about the operation of the linker, such
2110 as execution time and memory usage.
2111
2112 @kindex --sysroot=@var{directory}
2113 @item --sysroot=@var{directory}
2114 Use @var{directory} as the location of the sysroot, overriding the
2115 configure-time default. This option is only supported by linkers
2116 that were configured using @option{--with-sysroot}.
2117
2118 @kindex --task-link
2119 @item --task-link
2120 This is used by COFF/PE based targets to create a task-linked object
2121 file where all of the global symbols have been converted to statics.
2122
2123 @kindex --traditional-format
2124 @cindex traditional format
2125 @item --traditional-format
2126 For some targets, the output of @command{ld} is different in some ways from
2127 the output of some existing linker. This switch requests @command{ld} to
2128 use the traditional format instead.
2129
2130 @cindex dbx
2131 For example, on SunOS, @command{ld} combines duplicate entries in the
2132 symbol string table. This can reduce the size of an output file with
2133 full debugging information by over 30 percent. Unfortunately, the SunOS
2134 @code{dbx} program can not read the resulting program (@code{gdb} has no
2135 trouble). The @samp{--traditional-format} switch tells @command{ld} to not
2136 combine duplicate entries.
2137
2138 @kindex --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2139 @item --section-start=@var{sectionname}=@var{org}
2140 Locate a section in the output file at the absolute
2141 address given by @var{org}. You may use this option as many
2142 times as necessary to locate multiple sections in the command
2143 line.
2144 @var{org} must be a single hexadecimal integer;
2145 for compatibility with other linkers, you may omit the leading
2146 @samp{0x} usually associated with hexadecimal values. @emph{Note:} there
2147 should be no white space between @var{sectionname}, the equals
2148 sign (``@key{=}''), and @var{org}.
2149
2150 @kindex -Tbss=@var{org}
2151 @kindex -Tdata=@var{org}
2152 @kindex -Ttext=@var{org}
2153 @cindex segment origins, cmd line
2154 @item -Tbss=@var{org}
2155 @itemx -Tdata=@var{org}
2156 @itemx -Ttext=@var{org}
2157 Same as @option{--section-start}, with @code{.bss}, @code{.data} or
2158 @code{.text} as the @var{sectionname}.
2159
2160 @kindex -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2161 @item -Ttext-segment=@var{org}
2162 @cindex text segment origin, cmd line
2163 When creating an ELF executable, it will set the address of the first
2164 byte of the text segment.
2165
2166 @kindex -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2167 @item -Trodata-segment=@var{org}
2168 @cindex rodata segment origin, cmd line
2169 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for a target where
2170 the read-only data is in its own segment separate from the executable
2171 text, it will set the address of the first byte of the read-only data segment.
2172
2173 @kindex -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2174 @item -Tldata-segment=@var{org}
2175 @cindex ldata segment origin, cmd line
2176 When creating an ELF executable or shared object for x86-64 medium memory
2177 model, it will set the address of the first byte of the ldata segment.
2178
2179 @kindex --unresolved-symbols
2180 @item --unresolved-symbols=@var{method}
2181 Determine how to handle unresolved symbols. There are four possible
2182 values for @samp{method}:
2183
2184 @table @samp
2185 @item ignore-all
2186 Do not report any unresolved symbols.
2187
2188 @item report-all
2189 Report all unresolved symbols. This is the default.
2190
2191 @item ignore-in-object-files
2192 Report unresolved symbols that are contained in shared libraries, but
2193 ignore them if they come from regular object files.
2194
2195 @item ignore-in-shared-libs
2196 Report unresolved symbols that come from regular object files, but
2197 ignore them if they come from shared libraries. This can be useful
2198 when creating a dynamic binary and it is known that all the shared
2199 libraries that it should be referencing are included on the linker's
2200 command line.
2201 @end table
2202
2203 The behaviour for shared libraries on their own can also be controlled
2204 by the @option{--[no-]allow-shlib-undefined} option.
2205
2206 Normally the linker will generate an error message for each reported
2207 unresolved symbol but the option @option{--warn-unresolved-symbols}
2208 can change this to a warning.
2209
2210 @kindex --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2211 @cindex verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2212 @item --dll-verbose
2213 @itemx --verbose[=@var{NUMBER}]
2214 Display the version number for @command{ld} and list the linker emulations
2215 supported. Display which input files can and cannot be opened. Display
2216 the linker script being used by the linker. If the optional @var{NUMBER}
2217 argument > 1, plugin symbol status will also be displayed.
2218
2219 @kindex --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2220 @cindex version script, symbol versions
2221 @item --version-script=@var{version-scriptfile}
2222 Specify the name of a version script to the linker. This is typically
2223 used when creating shared libraries to specify additional information
2224 about the version hierarchy for the library being created. This option
2225 is only fully supported on ELF platforms which support shared libraries;
2226 see @ref{VERSION}. It is partially supported on PE platforms, which can
2227 use version scripts to filter symbol visibility in auto-export mode: any
2228 symbols marked @samp{local} in the version script will not be exported.
2229 @xref{WIN32}.
2230
2231 @kindex --warn-common
2232 @cindex warnings, on combining symbols
2233 @cindex combining symbols, warnings on
2234 @item --warn-common
2235 Warn when a common symbol is combined with another common symbol or with
2236 a symbol definition. Unix linkers allow this somewhat sloppy practice,
2237 but linkers on some other operating systems do not. This option allows
2238 you to find potential problems from combining global symbols.
2239 Unfortunately, some C libraries use this practice, so you may get some
2240 warnings about symbols in the libraries as well as in your programs.
2241
2242 There are three kinds of global symbols, illustrated here by C examples:
2243
2244 @table @samp
2245 @item int i = 1;
2246 A definition, which goes in the initialized data section of the output
2247 file.
2248
2249 @item extern int i;
2250 An undefined reference, which does not allocate space.
2251 There must be either a definition or a common symbol for the
2252 variable somewhere.
2253
2254 @item int i;
2255 A common symbol. If there are only (one or more) common symbols for a
2256 variable, it goes in the uninitialized data area of the output file.
2257 The linker merges multiple common symbols for the same variable into a
2258 single symbol. If they are of different sizes, it picks the largest
2259 size. The linker turns a common symbol into a declaration, if there is
2260 a definition of the same variable.
2261 @end table
2262
2263 The @samp{--warn-common} option can produce five kinds of warnings.
2264 Each warning consists of a pair of lines: the first describes the symbol
2265 just encountered, and the second describes the previous symbol
2266 encountered with the same name. One or both of the two symbols will be
2267 a common symbol.
2268
2269 @enumerate
2270 @item
2271 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because there is already a
2272 definition for the symbol.
2273 @smallexample
2274 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2275 overridden by definition
2276 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: defined here
2277 @end smallexample
2278
2279 @item
2280 Turning a common symbol into a reference, because a later definition for
2281 the symbol is encountered. This is the same as the previous case,
2282 except that the symbols are encountered in a different order.
2283 @smallexample
2284 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: definition of `@var{symbol}'
2285 overriding common
2286 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common is here
2287 @end smallexample
2288
2289 @item
2290 Merging a common symbol with a previous same-sized common symbol.
2291 @smallexample
2292 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: multiple common
2293 of `@var{symbol}'
2294 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: previous common is here
2295 @end smallexample
2296
2297 @item
2298 Merging a common symbol with a previous larger common symbol.
2299 @smallexample
2300 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2301 overridden by larger common
2302 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: larger common is here
2303 @end smallexample
2304
2305 @item
2306 Merging a common symbol with a previous smaller common symbol. This is
2307 the same as the previous case, except that the symbols are
2308 encountered in a different order.
2309 @smallexample
2310 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: common of `@var{symbol}'
2311 overriding smaller common
2312 @var{file}(@var{section}): warning: smaller common is here
2313 @end smallexample
2314 @end enumerate
2315
2316 @kindex --warn-constructors
2317 @item --warn-constructors
2318 Warn if any global constructors are used. This is only useful for a few
2319 object file formats. For formats like COFF or ELF, the linker can not
2320 detect the use of global constructors.
2321
2322 @kindex --warn-multiple-gp
2323 @item --warn-multiple-gp
2324 Warn if multiple global pointer values are required in the output file.
2325 This is only meaningful for certain processors, such as the Alpha.
2326 Specifically, some processors put large-valued constants in a special
2327 section. A special register (the global pointer) points into the middle
2328 of this section, so that constants can be loaded efficiently via a
2329 base-register relative addressing mode. Since the offset in
2330 base-register relative mode is fixed and relatively small (e.g., 16
2331 bits), this limits the maximum size of the constant pool. Thus, in
2332 large programs, it is often necessary to use multiple global pointer
2333 values in order to be able to address all possible constants. This
2334 option causes a warning to be issued whenever this case occurs.
2335
2336 @kindex --warn-once
2337 @cindex warnings, on undefined symbols
2338 @cindex undefined symbols, warnings on
2339 @item --warn-once
2340 Only warn once for each undefined symbol, rather than once per module
2341 which refers to it.
2342
2343 @kindex --warn-section-align
2344 @cindex warnings, on section alignment
2345 @cindex section alignment, warnings on
2346 @item --warn-section-align
2347 Warn if the address of an output section is changed because of
2348 alignment. Typically, the alignment will be set by an input section.
2349 The address will only be changed if it not explicitly specified; that
2350 is, if the @code{SECTIONS} command does not specify a start address for
2351 the section (@pxref{SECTIONS}).
2352
2353 @kindex --warn-shared-textrel
2354 @item --warn-shared-textrel
2355 Warn if the linker adds a DT_TEXTREL to a shared object.
2356
2357 @kindex --warn-alternate-em
2358 @item --warn-alternate-em
2359 Warn if an object has alternate ELF machine code.
2360
2361 @kindex --warn-unresolved-symbols
2362 @item --warn-unresolved-symbols
2363 If the linker is going to report an unresolved symbol (see the option
2364 @option{--unresolved-symbols}) it will normally generate an error.
2365 This option makes it generate a warning instead.
2366
2367 @kindex --error-unresolved-symbols
2368 @item --error-unresolved-symbols
2369 This restores the linker's default behaviour of generating errors when
2370 it is reporting unresolved symbols.
2371
2372 @kindex --whole-archive
2373 @cindex including an entire archive
2374 @item --whole-archive
2375 For each archive mentioned on the command line after the
2376 @option{--whole-archive} option, include every object file in the archive
2377 in the link, rather than searching the archive for the required object
2378 files. This is normally used to turn an archive file into a shared
2379 library, forcing every object to be included in the resulting shared
2380 library. This option may be used more than once.
2381
2382 Two notes when using this option from gcc: First, gcc doesn't know
2383 about this option, so you have to use @option{-Wl,-whole-archive}.
2384 Second, don't forget to use @option{-Wl,-no-whole-archive} after your
2385 list of archives, because gcc will add its own list of archives to
2386 your link and you may not want this flag to affect those as well.
2387
2388 @kindex --wrap=@var{symbol}
2389 @item --wrap=@var{symbol}
2390 Use a wrapper function for @var{symbol}. Any undefined reference to
2391 @var{symbol} will be resolved to @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. Any
2392 undefined reference to @code{__real_@var{symbol}} will be resolved to
2393 @var{symbol}.
2394
2395 This can be used to provide a wrapper for a system function. The
2396 wrapper function should be called @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. If it
2397 wishes to call the system function, it should call
2398 @code{__real_@var{symbol}}.
2399
2400 Here is a trivial example:
2401
2402 @smallexample
2403 void *
2404 __wrap_malloc (size_t c)
2405 @{
2406 printf ("malloc called with %zu\n", c);
2407 return __real_malloc (c);
2408 @}
2409 @end smallexample
2410
2411 If you link other code with this file using @option{--wrap malloc}, then
2412 all calls to @code{malloc} will call the function @code{__wrap_malloc}
2413 instead. The call to @code{__real_malloc} in @code{__wrap_malloc} will
2414 call the real @code{malloc} function.
2415
2416 You may wish to provide a @code{__real_malloc} function as well, so that
2417 links without the @option{--wrap} option will succeed. If you do this,
2418 you should not put the definition of @code{__real_malloc} in the same
2419 file as @code{__wrap_malloc}; if you do, the assembler may resolve the
2420 call before the linker has a chance to wrap it to @code{malloc}.
2421
2422 Only undefined references are replaced by the linker. So, translation unit
2423 internal references to @var{symbol} are not resolved to
2424 @code{__wrap_@var{symbol}}. In the next example, the call to @code{f} in
2425 @code{g} is not resolved to @code{__wrap_f}.
2426
2427 @smallexample
2428 int
2429 f (void)
2430 @{
2431 return 123;
2432 @}
2433
2434 int
2435 g (void)
2436 @{
2437 return f();
2438 @}
2439 @end smallexample
2440
2441 @kindex --eh-frame-hdr
2442 @kindex --no-eh-frame-hdr
2443 @item --eh-frame-hdr
2444 @itemx --no-eh-frame-hdr
2445 Request (@option{--eh-frame-hdr}) or suppress
2446 (@option{--no-eh-frame-hdr}) the creation of @code{.eh_frame_hdr}
2447 section and ELF @code{PT_GNU_EH_FRAME} segment header.
2448
2449 @kindex --ld-generated-unwind-info
2450 @item --no-ld-generated-unwind-info
2451 Request creation of @code{.eh_frame} unwind info for linker
2452 generated code sections like PLT. This option is on by default
2453 if linker generated unwind info is supported.
2454
2455 @kindex --enable-new-dtags
2456 @kindex --disable-new-dtags
2457 @item --enable-new-dtags
2458 @itemx --disable-new-dtags
2459 This linker can create the new dynamic tags in ELF. But the older ELF
2460 systems may not understand them. If you specify
2461 @option{--enable-new-dtags}, the new dynamic tags will be created as needed
2462 and older dynamic tags will be omitted.
2463 If you specify @option{--disable-new-dtags}, no new dynamic tags will be
2464 created. By default, the new dynamic tags are not created. Note that
2465 those options are only available for ELF systems.
2466
2467 @kindex --hash-size=@var{number}
2468 @item --hash-size=@var{number}
2469 Set the default size of the linker's hash tables to a prime number
2470 close to @var{number}. Increasing this value can reduce the length of
2471 time it takes the linker to perform its tasks, at the expense of
2472 increasing the linker's memory requirements. Similarly reducing this
2473 value can reduce the memory requirements at the expense of speed.
2474
2475 @kindex --hash-style=@var{style}
2476 @item --hash-style=@var{style}
2477 Set the type of linker's hash table(s). @var{style} can be either
2478 @code{sysv} for classic ELF @code{.hash} section, @code{gnu} for
2479 new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash} section or @code{both} for both
2480 the classic ELF @code{.hash} and new style GNU @code{.gnu.hash}
2481 hash tables. The default depends upon how the linker was configured,
2482 but for most Linux based systems it will be @code{both}.
2483
2484 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=none
2485 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2486 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2487 @kindex --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2488 @item --compress-debug-sections=none
2489 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib
2490 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu
2491 @itemx --compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi
2492 On ELF platforms, these options control how DWARF debug sections are
2493 compressed using zlib.
2494
2495 @option{--compress-debug-sections=none} doesn't compress DWARF debug
2496 sections. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gnu} compresses
2497 DWARF debug sections and renames them to begin with @samp{.zdebug}
2498 instead of @samp{.debug}. @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}
2499 also compresses DWARF debug sections, but rather than renaming them it
2500 sets the SHF_COMPRESSED flag in the sections' headers.
2501
2502 The @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib} option is an alias for
2503 @option{--compress-debug-sections=zlib-gabi}.
2504
2505 Note that this option overrides any compression in input debug
2506 sections, so if a binary is linked with @option{--compress-debug-sections=none}
2507 for example, then any compressed debug sections in input files will be
2508 uncompressed before they are copied into the output binary.
2509
2510 The default compression behaviour varies depending upon the target
2511 involved and the configure options used to build the toolchain. The
2512 default can be determined by examining the output from the linker's
2513 @option{--help} option.
2514
2515 @kindex --reduce-memory-overheads
2516 @item --reduce-memory-overheads
2517 This option reduces memory requirements at ld runtime, at the expense of
2518 linking speed. This was introduced to select the old O(n^2) algorithm
2519 for link map file generation, rather than the new O(n) algorithm which uses
2520 about 40% more memory for symbol storage.
2521
2522 Another effect of the switch is to set the default hash table size to
2523 1021, which again saves memory at the cost of lengthening the linker's
2524 run time. This is not done however if the @option{--hash-size} switch
2525 has been used.
2526
2527 The @option{--reduce-memory-overheads} switch may be also be used to
2528 enable other tradeoffs in future versions of the linker.
2529
2530 @kindex --build-id
2531 @kindex --build-id=@var{style}
2532 @item --build-id
2533 @itemx --build-id=@var{style}
2534 Request the creation of a @code{.note.gnu.build-id} ELF note section
2535 or a @code{.buildid} COFF section. The contents of the note are
2536 unique bits identifying this linked file. @var{style} can be
2537 @code{uuid} to use 128 random bits, @code{sha1} to use a 160-bit
2538 @sc{SHA1} hash on the normative parts of the output contents,
2539 @code{md5} to use a 128-bit @sc{MD5} hash on the normative parts of
2540 the output contents, or @code{0x@var{hexstring}} to use a chosen bit
2541 string specified as an even number of hexadecimal digits (@code{-} and
2542 @code{:} characters between digit pairs are ignored). If @var{style}
2543 is omitted, @code{sha1} is used.
2544
2545 The @code{md5} and @code{sha1} styles produces an identifier
2546 that is always the same in an identical output file, but will be
2547 unique among all nonidentical output files. It is not intended
2548 to be compared as a checksum for the file's contents. A linked
2549 file may be changed later by other tools, but the build ID bit
2550 string identifying the original linked file does not change.
2551
2552 Passing @code{none} for @var{style} disables the setting from any
2553 @code{--build-id} options earlier on the command line.
2554 @end table
2555
2556 @c man end
2557
2558 @subsection Options Specific to i386 PE Targets
2559
2560 @c man begin OPTIONS
2561
2562 The i386 PE linker supports the @option{-shared} option, which causes
2563 the output to be a dynamically linked library (DLL) instead of a
2564 normal executable. You should name the output @code{*.dll} when you
2565 use this option. In addition, the linker fully supports the standard
2566 @code{*.def} files, which may be specified on the linker command line
2567 like an object file (in fact, it should precede archives it exports
2568 symbols from, to ensure that they get linked in, just like a normal
2569 object file).
2570
2571 In addition to the options common to all targets, the i386 PE linker
2572 support additional command-line options that are specific to the i386
2573 PE target. Options that take values may be separated from their
2574 values by either a space or an equals sign.
2575
2576 @table @gcctabopt
2577
2578 @kindex --add-stdcall-alias
2579 @item --add-stdcall-alias
2580 If given, symbols with a stdcall suffix (@@@var{nn}) will be exported
2581 as-is and also with the suffix stripped.
2582 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2583
2584 @kindex --base-file
2585 @item --base-file @var{file}
2586 Use @var{file} as the name of a file in which to save the base
2587 addresses of all the relocations needed for generating DLLs with
2588 @file{dlltool}.
2589 [This is an i386 PE specific option]
2590
2591 @kindex --dll
2592 @item --dll
2593 Create a DLL instead of a regular executable. You may also use
2594 @option{-shared} or specify a @code{LIBRARY} in a given @code{.def}
2595 file.
2596 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2597
2598 @kindex --enable-long-section-names
2599 @kindex --disable-long-section-names
2600 @item --enable-long-section-names
2601 @itemx --disable-long-section-names
2602 The PE variants of the COFF object format add an extension that permits
2603 the use of section names longer than eight characters, the normal limit
2604 for COFF. By default, these names are only allowed in object files, as
2605 fully-linked executable images do not carry the COFF string table required
2606 to support the longer names. As a GNU extension, it is possible to
2607 allow their use in executable images as well, or to (probably pointlessly!)
2608 disallow it in object files, by using these two options. Executable images
2609 generated with these long section names are slightly non-standard, carrying
2610 as they do a string table, and may generate confusing output when examined
2611 with non-GNU PE-aware tools, such as file viewers and dumpers. However,
2612 GDB relies on the use of PE long section names to find Dwarf-2 debug
2613 information sections in an executable image at runtime, and so if neither
2614 option is specified on the command-line, @command{ld} will enable long
2615 section names, overriding the default and technically correct behaviour,
2616 when it finds the presence of debug information while linking an executable
2617 image and not stripping symbols.
2618 [This option is valid for all PE targeted ports of the linker]
2619
2620 @kindex --enable-stdcall-fixup
2621 @kindex --disable-stdcall-fixup
2622 @item --enable-stdcall-fixup
2623 @itemx --disable-stdcall-fixup
2624 If the link finds a symbol that it cannot resolve, it will attempt to
2625 do ``fuzzy linking'' by looking for another defined symbol that differs
2626 only in the format of the symbol name (cdecl vs stdcall) and will
2627 resolve that symbol by linking to the match. For example, the
2628 undefined symbol @code{_foo} might be linked to the function
2629 @code{_foo@@12}, or the undefined symbol @code{_bar@@16} might be linked
2630 to the function @code{_bar}. When the linker does this, it prints a
2631 warning, since it normally should have failed to link, but sometimes
2632 import libraries generated from third-party dlls may need this feature
2633 to be usable. If you specify @option{--enable-stdcall-fixup}, this
2634 feature is fully enabled and warnings are not printed. If you specify
2635 @option{--disable-stdcall-fixup}, this feature is disabled and such
2636 mismatches are considered to be errors.
2637 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2638
2639 @kindex --leading-underscore
2640 @kindex --no-leading-underscore
2641 @item --leading-underscore
2642 @itemx --no-leading-underscore
2643 For most targets default symbol-prefix is an underscore and is defined
2644 in target's description. By this option it is possible to
2645 disable/enable the default underscore symbol-prefix.
2646
2647 @cindex DLLs, creating
2648 @kindex --export-all-symbols
2649 @item --export-all-symbols
2650 If given, all global symbols in the objects used to build a DLL will
2651 be exported by the DLL. Note that this is the default if there
2652 otherwise wouldn't be any exported symbols. When symbols are
2653 explicitly exported via DEF files or implicitly exported via function
2654 attributes, the default is to not export anything else unless this
2655 option is given. Note that the symbols @code{DllMain@@12},
2656 @code{DllEntryPoint@@0}, @code{DllMainCRTStartup@@12}, and
2657 @code{impure_ptr} will not be automatically
2658 exported. Also, symbols imported from other DLLs will not be
2659 re-exported, nor will symbols specifying the DLL's internal layout
2660 such as those beginning with @code{_head_} or ending with
2661 @code{_iname}. In addition, no symbols from @code{libgcc},
2662 @code{libstd++}, @code{libmingw32}, or @code{crtX.o} will be exported.
2663 Symbols whose names begin with @code{__rtti_} or @code{__builtin_} will
2664 not be exported, to help with C++ DLLs. Finally, there is an
2665 extensive list of cygwin-private symbols that are not exported
2666 (obviously, this applies on when building DLLs for cygwin targets).
2667 These cygwin-excludes are: @code{_cygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2668 @code{_cygwin_crt0_common@@8}, @code{_cygwin_noncygwin_dll_entry@@12},
2669 @code{_fmode}, @code{_impure_ptr}, @code{cygwin_attach_dll},
2670 @code{cygwin_premain0}, @code{cygwin_premain1}, @code{cygwin_premain2},
2671 @code{cygwin_premain3}, and @code{environ}.
2672 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2673
2674 @kindex --exclude-symbols
2675 @item --exclude-symbols @var{symbol},@var{symbol},...
2676 Specifies a list of symbols which should not be automatically
2677 exported. The symbol names may be delimited by commas or colons.
2678 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2679
2680 @kindex --exclude-all-symbols
2681 @item --exclude-all-symbols
2682 Specifies no symbols should be automatically exported.
2683 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2684
2685 @kindex --file-alignment
2686 @item --file-alignment
2687 Specify the file alignment. Sections in the file will always begin at
2688 file offsets which are multiples of this number. This defaults to
2689 512.
2690 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2691
2692 @cindex heap size
2693 @kindex --heap
2694 @item --heap @var{reserve}
2695 @itemx --heap @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2696 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2697 to be used as heap for this program. The default is 1MB reserved, 4K
2698 committed.
2699 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2700
2701 @cindex image base
2702 @kindex --image-base
2703 @item --image-base @var{value}
2704 Use @var{value} as the base address of your program or dll. This is
2705 the lowest memory location that will be used when your program or dll
2706 is loaded. To reduce the need to relocate and improve performance of
2707 your dlls, each should have a unique base address and not overlap any
2708 other dlls. The default is 0x400000 for executables, and 0x10000000
2709 for dlls.
2710 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2711
2712 @kindex --kill-at
2713 @item --kill-at
2714 If given, the stdcall suffixes (@@@var{nn}) will be stripped from
2715 symbols before they are exported.
2716 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2717
2718 @kindex --large-address-aware
2719 @item --large-address-aware
2720 If given, the appropriate bit in the ``Characteristics'' field of the COFF
2721 header is set to indicate that this executable supports virtual addresses
2722 greater than 2 gigabytes. This should be used in conjunction with the /3GB
2723 or /USERVA=@var{value} megabytes switch in the ``[operating systems]''
2724 section of the BOOT.INI. Otherwise, this bit has no effect.
2725 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2726
2727 @kindex --disable-large-address-aware
2728 @item --disable-large-address-aware
2729 Reverts the effect of a previous @samp{--large-address-aware} option.
2730 This is useful if @samp{--large-address-aware} is always set by the compiler
2731 driver (e.g. Cygwin gcc) and the executable does not support virtual
2732 addresses greater than 2 gigabytes.
2733 [This option is specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2734
2735 @kindex --major-image-version
2736 @item --major-image-version @var{value}
2737 Sets the major number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 1.
2738 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2739
2740 @kindex --major-os-version
2741 @item --major-os-version @var{value}
2742 Sets the major number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 4.
2743 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2744
2745 @kindex --major-subsystem-version
2746 @item --major-subsystem-version @var{value}
2747 Sets the major number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 4.
2748 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2749
2750 @kindex --minor-image-version
2751 @item --minor-image-version @var{value}
2752 Sets the minor number of the ``image version''. Defaults to 0.
2753 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2754
2755 @kindex --minor-os-version
2756 @item --minor-os-version @var{value}
2757 Sets the minor number of the ``os version''. Defaults to 0.
2758 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2759
2760 @kindex --minor-subsystem-version
2761 @item --minor-subsystem-version @var{value}
2762 Sets the minor number of the ``subsystem version''. Defaults to 0.
2763 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2764
2765 @cindex DEF files, creating
2766 @cindex DLLs, creating
2767 @kindex --output-def
2768 @item --output-def @var{file}
2769 The linker will create the file @var{file} which will contain a DEF
2770 file corresponding to the DLL the linker is generating. This DEF file
2771 (which should be called @code{*.def}) may be used to create an import
2772 library with @code{dlltool} or may be used as a reference to
2773 automatically or implicitly exported symbols.
2774 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2775
2776 @cindex DLLs, creating
2777 @kindex --enable-auto-image-base
2778 @item --enable-auto-image-base
2779 @itemx --enable-auto-image-base=@var{value}
2780 Automatically choose the image base for DLLs, optionally starting with base
2781 @var{value}, unless one is specified using the @code{--image-base} argument.
2782 By using a hash generated from the dllname to create unique image bases
2783 for each DLL, in-memory collisions and relocations which can delay program
2784 execution are avoided.
2785 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2786
2787 @kindex --disable-auto-image-base
2788 @item --disable-auto-image-base
2789 Do not automatically generate a unique image base. If there is no
2790 user-specified image base (@code{--image-base}) then use the platform
2791 default.
2792 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2793
2794 @cindex DLLs, linking to
2795 @kindex --dll-search-prefix
2796 @item --dll-search-prefix @var{string}
2797 When linking dynamically to a dll without an import library,
2798 search for @code{<string><basename>.dll} in preference to
2799 @code{lib<basename>.dll}. This behaviour allows easy distinction
2800 between DLLs built for the various "subplatforms": native, cygwin,
2801 uwin, pw, etc. For instance, cygwin DLLs typically use
2802 @code{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}.
2803 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2804
2805 @kindex --enable-auto-import
2806 @item --enable-auto-import
2807 Do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to @code{__imp__symbol} for
2808 DATA imports from DLLs, thus making it possible to bypass the dllimport
2809 mechanism on the user side and to reference unmangled symbol names.
2810 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2811
2812 The following remarks pertain to the original implementation of the
2813 feature and are obsolete nowadays for Cygwin and MinGW targets.
2814
2815 Note: Use of the 'auto-import' extension will cause the text section
2816 of the image file to be made writable. This does not conform to the
2817 PE-COFF format specification published by Microsoft.
2818
2819 Note - use of the 'auto-import' extension will also cause read only
2820 data which would normally be placed into the .rdata section to be
2821 placed into the .data section instead. This is in order to work
2822 around a problem with consts that is described here:
2823 http://www.cygwin.com/ml/cygwin/2004-09/msg01101.html
2824
2825 Using 'auto-import' generally will 'just work' -- but sometimes you may
2826 see this message:
2827
2828 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
2829 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
2830
2831 This message occurs when some (sub)expression accesses an address
2832 ultimately given by the sum of two constants (Win32 import tables only
2833 allow one). Instances where this may occur include accesses to member
2834 fields of struct variables imported from a DLL, as well as using a
2835 constant index into an array variable imported from a DLL. Any
2836 multiword variable (arrays, structs, long long, etc) may trigger
2837 this error condition. However, regardless of the exact data type
2838 of the offending exported variable, ld will always detect it, issue
2839 the warning, and exit.
2840
2841 There are several ways to address this difficulty, regardless of the
2842 data type of the exported variable:
2843
2844 One way is to use --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc switch. This leaves the task
2845 of adjusting references in your client code for runtime environment, so
2846 this method works only when runtime environment supports this feature.
2847
2848 A second solution is to force one of the 'constants' to be a variable --
2849 that is, unknown and un-optimizable at compile time. For arrays,
2850 there are two possibilities: a) make the indexee (the array's address)
2851 a variable, or b) make the 'constant' index a variable. Thus:
2852
2853 @example
2854 extern type extern_array[];
2855 extern_array[1] -->
2856 @{ volatile type *t=extern_array; t[1] @}
2857 @end example
2858
2859 or
2860
2861 @example
2862 extern type extern_array[];
2863 extern_array[1] -->
2864 @{ volatile int t=1; extern_array[t] @}
2865 @end example
2866
2867 For structs (and most other multiword data types) the only option
2868 is to make the struct itself (or the long long, or the ...) variable:
2869
2870 @example
2871 extern struct s extern_struct;
2872 extern_struct.field -->
2873 @{ volatile struct s *t=&extern_struct; t->field @}
2874 @end example
2875
2876 or
2877
2878 @example
2879 extern long long extern_ll;
2880 extern_ll -->
2881 @{ volatile long long * local_ll=&extern_ll; *local_ll @}
2882 @end example
2883
2884 A third method of dealing with this difficulty is to abandon
2885 'auto-import' for the offending symbol and mark it with
2886 @code{__declspec(dllimport)}. However, in practice that
2887 requires using compile-time #defines to indicate whether you are
2888 building a DLL, building client code that will link to the DLL, or
2889 merely building/linking to a static library. In making the choice
2890 between the various methods of resolving the 'direct address with
2891 constant offset' problem, you should consider typical real-world usage:
2892
2893 Original:
2894 @example
2895 --foo.h
2896 extern int arr[];
2897 --foo.c
2898 #include "foo.h"
2899 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2900 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2901 @}
2902 @end example
2903
2904 Solution 1:
2905 @example
2906 --foo.h
2907 extern int arr[];
2908 --foo.c
2909 #include "foo.h"
2910 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2911 /* This workaround is for win32 and cygwin; do not "optimize" */
2912 volatile int *parr = arr;
2913 printf("%d\n",parr[1]);
2914 @}
2915 @end example
2916
2917 Solution 2:
2918 @example
2919 --foo.h
2920 /* Note: auto-export is assumed (no __declspec(dllexport)) */
2921 #if (defined(_WIN32) || defined(__CYGWIN__)) && \
2922 !(defined(FOO_BUILD_DLL) || defined(FOO_STATIC))
2923 #define FOO_IMPORT __declspec(dllimport)
2924 #else
2925 #define FOO_IMPORT
2926 #endif
2927 extern FOO_IMPORT int arr[];
2928 --foo.c
2929 #include "foo.h"
2930 void main(int argc, char **argv)@{
2931 printf("%d\n",arr[1]);
2932 @}
2933 @end example
2934
2935 A fourth way to avoid this problem is to re-code your
2936 library to use a functional interface rather than a data interface
2937 for the offending variables (e.g. set_foo() and get_foo() accessor
2938 functions).
2939
2940 @kindex --disable-auto-import
2941 @item --disable-auto-import
2942 Do not attempt to do sophisticated linking of @code{_symbol} to
2943 @code{__imp__symbol} for DATA imports from DLLs.
2944 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2945
2946 @kindex --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2947 @item --enable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2948 If your code contains expressions described in --enable-auto-import section,
2949 that is, DATA imports from DLL with non-zero offset, this switch will create
2950 a vector of 'runtime pseudo relocations' which can be used by runtime
2951 environment to adjust references to such data in your client code.
2952 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2953
2954 @kindex --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2955 @item --disable-runtime-pseudo-reloc
2956 Do not create pseudo relocations for non-zero offset DATA imports from DLLs.
2957 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2958
2959 @kindex --enable-extra-pe-debug
2960 @item --enable-extra-pe-debug
2961 Show additional debug info related to auto-import symbol thunking.
2962 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2963
2964 @kindex --section-alignment
2965 @item --section-alignment
2966 Sets the section alignment. Sections in memory will always begin at
2967 addresses which are a multiple of this number. Defaults to 0x1000.
2968 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2969
2970 @cindex stack size
2971 @kindex --stack
2972 @item --stack @var{reserve}
2973 @itemx --stack @var{reserve},@var{commit}
2974 Specify the number of bytes of memory to reserve (and optionally commit)
2975 to be used as stack for this program. The default is 2MB reserved, 4K
2976 committed.
2977 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2978
2979 @kindex --subsystem
2980 @item --subsystem @var{which}
2981 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}
2982 @itemx --subsystem @var{which}:@var{major}.@var{minor}
2983 Specifies the subsystem under which your program will execute. The
2984 legal values for @var{which} are @code{native}, @code{windows},
2985 @code{console}, @code{posix}, and @code{xbox}. You may optionally set
2986 the subsystem version also. Numeric values are also accepted for
2987 @var{which}.
2988 [This option is specific to the i386 PE targeted port of the linker]
2989
2990 The following options set flags in the @code{DllCharacteristics} field
2991 of the PE file header:
2992 [These options are specific to PE targeted ports of the linker]
2993
2994 @kindex --high-entropy-va
2995 @item --high-entropy-va
2996 Image is compatible with 64-bit address space layout randomization
2997 (ASLR).
2998 This option also implies @option{--dynamicbase} and
2999 @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3000
3001 @kindex --dynamicbase
3002 @item --dynamicbase
3003 The image base address may be relocated using address space layout
3004 randomization (ASLR). This feature was introduced with MS Windows
3005 Vista for i386 PE targets.
3006 This option also implies @option{--enable-reloc-section}.
3007
3008 @kindex --forceinteg
3009 @item --forceinteg
3010 Code integrity checks are enforced.
3011
3012 @kindex --nxcompat
3013 @item --nxcompat
3014 The image is compatible with the Data Execution Prevention.
3015 This feature was introduced with MS Windows XP SP2 for i386 PE targets.
3016
3017 @kindex --no-isolation
3018 @item --no-isolation
3019 Although the image understands isolation, do not isolate the image.
3020
3021 @kindex --no-seh
3022 @item --no-seh
3023 The image does not use SEH. No SE handler may be called from
3024 this image.
3025
3026 @kindex --no-bind
3027 @item --no-bind
3028 Do not bind this image.
3029
3030 @kindex --wdmdriver
3031 @item --wdmdriver
3032 The driver uses the MS Windows Driver Model.
3033
3034 @kindex --tsaware
3035 @item --tsaware
3036 The image is Terminal Server aware.
3037
3038 @kindex --insert-timestamp
3039 @item --insert-timestamp
3040 @itemx --no-insert-timestamp
3041 Insert a real timestamp into the image. This is the default behaviour
3042 as it matches legacy code and it means that the image will work with
3043 other, proprietary tools. The problem with this default is that it
3044 will result in slightly different images being produced each time the
3045 same sources are linked. The option @option{--no-insert-timestamp}
3046 can be used to insert a zero value for the timestamp, this ensuring
3047 that binaries produced from identical sources will compare
3048 identically.
3049
3050 @kindex --enable-reloc-section
3051 @item --enable-reloc-section
3052 Create the base relocation table, which is necessary if the image
3053 is loaded at a different image base than specified in the PE header.
3054 @end table
3055
3056 @c man end
3057
3058 @ifset C6X
3059 @subsection Options specific to C6X uClinux targets
3060
3061 @c man begin OPTIONS
3062
3063 The C6X uClinux target uses a binary format called DSBT to support shared
3064 libraries. Each shared library in the system needs to have a unique index;
3065 all executables use an index of 0.
3066
3067 @table @gcctabopt
3068
3069 @kindex --dsbt-size
3070 @item --dsbt-size @var{size}
3071 This option sets the number of entries in the DSBT of the current executable
3072 or shared library to @var{size}. The default is to create a table with 64
3073 entries.
3074
3075 @kindex --dsbt-index
3076 @item --dsbt-index @var{index}
3077 This option sets the DSBT index of the current executable or shared library
3078 to @var{index}. The default is 0, which is appropriate for generating
3079 executables. If a shared library is generated with a DSBT index of 0, the
3080 @code{R_C6000_DSBT_INDEX} relocs are copied into the output file.
3081
3082 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
3083 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent
3084 exidx entries in frame unwind info.
3085
3086 @end table
3087
3088 @c man end
3089 @end ifset
3090
3091 @ifset CSKY
3092 @subsection Options specific to C-SKY targets
3093
3094 @c man begin OPTIONS
3095
3096 @table @gcctabopt
3097
3098 @kindex --branch-stub on C-SKY
3099 @item --branch-stub
3100 This option enables linker branch relaxation by inserting branch stub
3101 sections when needed to extend the range of branches. This option is
3102 usually not required since C-SKY supports branch and call instructions that
3103 can access the full memory range and branch relaxation is normally handled by
3104 the compiler or assembler.
3105
3106 @kindex --stub-group-size on C-SKY
3107 @item --stub-group-size=@var{N}
3108 This option allows finer control of linker branch stub creation.
3109 It sets the maximum size of a group of input sections that can
3110 be handled by one stub section. A negative value of @var{N} locates
3111 stub sections after their branches, while a positive value allows stub
3112 sections to appear either before or after the branches. Values of
3113 @samp{1} or @samp{-1} indicate that the
3114 linker should choose suitable defaults.
3115
3116 @end table
3117
3118 @c man end
3119 @end ifset
3120
3121 @ifset M68HC11
3122 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 targets
3123
3124 @c man begin OPTIONS
3125
3126 The 68HC11 and 68HC12 linkers support specific options to control the
3127 memory bank switching mapping and trampoline code generation.
3128
3129 @table @gcctabopt
3130
3131 @kindex --no-trampoline
3132 @item --no-trampoline
3133 This option disables the generation of trampoline. By default a trampoline
3134 is generated for each far function which is called using a @code{jsr}
3135 instruction (this happens when a pointer to a far function is taken).
3136
3137 @kindex --bank-window
3138 @item --bank-window @var{name}
3139 This option indicates to the linker the name of the memory region in
3140 the @samp{MEMORY} specification that describes the memory bank window.
3141 The definition of such region is then used by the linker to compute
3142 paging and addresses within the memory window.
3143
3144 @end table
3145
3146 @c man end
3147 @end ifset
3148
3149 @ifset M68K
3150 @subsection Options specific to Motorola 68K target
3151
3152 @c man begin OPTIONS
3153
3154 The following options are supported to control handling of GOT generation
3155 when linking for 68K targets.
3156
3157 @table @gcctabopt
3158
3159 @kindex --got
3160 @item --got=@var{type}
3161 This option tells the linker which GOT generation scheme to use.
3162 @var{type} should be one of @samp{single}, @samp{negative},
3163 @samp{multigot} or @samp{target}. For more information refer to the
3164 Info entry for @file{ld}.
3165
3166 @end table
3167
3168 @c man end
3169 @end ifset
3170
3171 @ifset MIPS
3172 @subsection Options specific to MIPS targets
3173
3174 @c man begin OPTIONS
3175
3176 The following options are supported to control microMIPS instruction
3177 generation and branch relocation checks for ISA mode transitions when
3178 linking for MIPS targets.
3179
3180 @table @gcctabopt
3181
3182 @kindex --insn32
3183 @item --insn32
3184 @kindex --no-insn32
3185 @itemx --no-insn32
3186 These options control the choice of microMIPS instructions used in code
3187 generated by the linker, such as that in the PLT or lazy binding stubs,
3188 or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is used, then the linker only uses
3189 32-bit instruction encodings. By default or if @samp{--no-insn32} is
3190 used, all instruction encodings are used, including 16-bit ones where
3191 possible.
3192
3193 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
3194 @item --ignore-branch-isa
3195 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
3196 @itemx --no-ignore-branch-isa
3197 These options control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode
3198 transitions. If @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker
3199 accepts any branch relocations and any ISA mode transition required
3200 is lost in relocation calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL}
3201 instructions which meet relaxation conditions and are converted to
3202 equivalent @code{JALX} instructions as the associated relocation is
3203 calculated. By default or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used
3204 a check is made causing the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce
3205 an error.
3206
3207 @kindex --compact-branches
3208 @item --compact-branches
3209 @kindex --no-compact-branches
3210 @item --compact-branches
3211 These options control the generation of compact instructions by the linker
3212 in the PLT entries for MIPS R6.
3213
3214 @end table
3215
3216 @c man end
3217 @end ifset
3218
3219 @ifset UsesEnvVars
3220 @node Environment
3221 @section Environment Variables
3222
3223 @c man begin ENVIRONMENT
3224
3225 You can change the behaviour of @command{ld} with the environment variables
3226 @ifclear SingleFormat
3227 @code{GNUTARGET},
3228 @end ifclear
3229 @code{LDEMULATION} and @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE}.
3230
3231 @ifclear SingleFormat
3232 @kindex GNUTARGET
3233 @cindex default input format
3234 @code{GNUTARGET} determines the input-file object format if you don't
3235 use @samp{-b} (or its synonym @samp{--format}). Its value should be one
3236 of the BFD names for an input format (@pxref{BFD}). If there is no
3237 @code{GNUTARGET} in the environment, @command{ld} uses the natural format
3238 of the target. If @code{GNUTARGET} is set to @code{default} then BFD
3239 attempts to discover the input format by examining binary input files;
3240 this method often succeeds, but there are potential ambiguities, since
3241 there is no method of ensuring that the magic number used to specify
3242 object-file formats is unique. However, the configuration procedure for
3243 BFD on each system places the conventional format for that system first
3244 in the search-list, so ambiguities are resolved in favor of convention.
3245 @end ifclear
3246
3247 @kindex LDEMULATION
3248 @cindex default emulation
3249 @cindex emulation, default
3250 @code{LDEMULATION} determines the default emulation if you don't use the
3251 @samp{-m} option. The emulation can affect various aspects of linker
3252 behaviour, particularly the default linker script. You can list the
3253 available emulations with the @samp{--verbose} or @samp{-V} options. If
3254 the @samp{-m} option is not used, and the @code{LDEMULATION} environment
3255 variable is not defined, the default emulation depends upon how the
3256 linker was configured.
3257
3258 @kindex COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE
3259 @cindex demangling, default
3260 Normally, the linker will default to demangling symbols. However, if
3261 @code{COLLECT_NO_DEMANGLE} is set in the environment, then it will
3262 default to not demangling symbols. This environment variable is used in
3263 a similar fashion by the @code{gcc} linker wrapper program. The default
3264 may be overridden by the @samp{--demangle} and @samp{--no-demangle}
3265 options.
3266
3267 @c man end
3268 @end ifset
3269
3270 @node Scripts
3271 @chapter Linker Scripts
3272
3273 @cindex scripts
3274 @cindex linker scripts
3275 @cindex command files
3276 Every link is controlled by a @dfn{linker script}. This script is
3277 written in the linker command language.
3278
3279 The main purpose of the linker script is to describe how the sections in
3280 the input files should be mapped into the output file, and to control
3281 the memory layout of the output file. Most linker scripts do nothing
3282 more than this. However, when necessary, the linker script can also
3283 direct the linker to perform many other operations, using the commands
3284 described below.
3285
3286 The linker always uses a linker script. If you do not supply one
3287 yourself, the linker will use a default script that is compiled into the
3288 linker executable. You can use the @samp{--verbose} command-line option
3289 to display the default linker script. Certain command-line options,
3290 such as @samp{-r} or @samp{-N}, will affect the default linker script.
3291
3292 You may supply your own linker script by using the @samp{-T} command
3293 line option. When you do this, your linker script will replace the
3294 default linker script.
3295
3296 You may also use linker scripts implicitly by naming them as input files
3297 to the linker, as though they were files to be linked. @xref{Implicit
3298 Linker Scripts}.
3299
3300 @menu
3301 * Basic Script Concepts:: Basic Linker Script Concepts
3302 * Script Format:: Linker Script Format
3303 * Simple Example:: Simple Linker Script Example
3304 * Simple Commands:: Simple Linker Script Commands
3305 * Assignments:: Assigning Values to Symbols
3306 * SECTIONS:: SECTIONS Command
3307 * MEMORY:: MEMORY Command
3308 * PHDRS:: PHDRS Command
3309 * VERSION:: VERSION Command
3310 * Expressions:: Expressions in Linker Scripts
3311 * Implicit Linker Scripts:: Implicit Linker Scripts
3312 @end menu
3313
3314 @node Basic Script Concepts
3315 @section Basic Linker Script Concepts
3316 @cindex linker script concepts
3317 We need to define some basic concepts and vocabulary in order to
3318 describe the linker script language.
3319
3320 The linker combines input files into a single output file. The output
3321 file and each input file are in a special data format known as an
3322 @dfn{object file format}. Each file is called an @dfn{object file}.
3323 The output file is often called an @dfn{executable}, but for our
3324 purposes we will also call it an object file. Each object file has,
3325 among other things, a list of @dfn{sections}. We sometimes refer to a
3326 section in an input file as an @dfn{input section}; similarly, a section
3327 in the output file is an @dfn{output section}.
3328
3329 Each section in an object file has a name and a size. Most sections
3330 also have an associated block of data, known as the @dfn{section
3331 contents}. A section may be marked as @dfn{loadable}, which means that
3332 the contents should be loaded into memory when the output file is run.
3333 A section with no contents may be @dfn{allocatable}, which means that an
3334 area in memory should be set aside, but nothing in particular should be
3335 loaded there (in some cases this memory must be zeroed out). A section
3336 which is neither loadable nor allocatable typically contains some sort
3337 of debugging information.
3338
3339 Every loadable or allocatable output section has two addresses. The
3340 first is the @dfn{VMA}, or virtual memory address. This is the address
3341 the section will have when the output file is run. The second is the
3342 @dfn{LMA}, or load memory address. This is the address at which the
3343 section will be loaded. In most cases the two addresses will be the
3344 same. An example of when they might be different is when a data section
3345 is loaded into ROM, and then copied into RAM when the program starts up
3346 (this technique is often used to initialize global variables in a ROM
3347 based system). In this case the ROM address would be the LMA, and the
3348 RAM address would be the VMA.
3349
3350 You can see the sections in an object file by using the @code{objdump}
3351 program with the @samp{-h} option.
3352
3353 Every object file also has a list of @dfn{symbols}, known as the
3354 @dfn{symbol table}. A symbol may be defined or undefined. Each symbol
3355 has a name, and each defined symbol has an address, among other
3356 information. If you compile a C or C++ program into an object file, you
3357 will get a defined symbol for every defined function and global or
3358 static variable. Every undefined function or global variable which is
3359 referenced in the input file will become an undefined symbol.
3360
3361 You can see the symbols in an object file by using the @code{nm}
3362 program, or by using the @code{objdump} program with the @samp{-t}
3363 option.
3364
3365 @node Script Format
3366 @section Linker Script Format
3367 @cindex linker script format
3368 Linker scripts are text files.
3369
3370 You write a linker script as a series of commands. Each command is
3371 either a keyword, possibly followed by arguments, or an assignment to a
3372 symbol. You may separate commands using semicolons. Whitespace is
3373 generally ignored.
3374
3375 Strings such as file or format names can normally be entered directly.
3376 If the file name contains a character such as a comma which would
3377 otherwise serve to separate file names, you may put the file name in
3378 double quotes. There is no way to use a double quote character in a
3379 file name.
3380
3381 You may include comments in linker scripts just as in C, delimited by
3382 @samp{/*} and @samp{*/}. As in C, comments are syntactically equivalent
3383 to whitespace.
3384
3385 @node Simple Example
3386 @section Simple Linker Script Example
3387 @cindex linker script example
3388 @cindex example of linker script
3389 Many linker scripts are fairly simple.
3390
3391 The simplest possible linker script has just one command:
3392 @samp{SECTIONS}. You use the @samp{SECTIONS} command to describe the
3393 memory layout of the output file.
3394
3395 The @samp{SECTIONS} command is a powerful command. Here we will
3396 describe a simple use of it. Let's assume your program consists only of
3397 code, initialized data, and uninitialized data. These will be in the
3398 @samp{.text}, @samp{.data}, and @samp{.bss} sections, respectively.
3399 Let's assume further that these are the only sections which appear in
3400 your input files.
3401
3402 For this example, let's say that the code should be loaded at address
3403 0x10000, and that the data should start at address 0x8000000. Here is a
3404 linker script which will do that:
3405 @smallexample
3406 SECTIONS
3407 @{
3408 . = 0x10000;
3409 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
3410 . = 0x8000000;
3411 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
3412 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
3413 @}
3414 @end smallexample
3415
3416 You write the @samp{SECTIONS} command as the keyword @samp{SECTIONS},
3417 followed by a series of symbol assignments and output section
3418 descriptions enclosed in curly braces.
3419
3420 The first line inside the @samp{SECTIONS} command of the above example
3421 sets the value of the special symbol @samp{.}, which is the location
3422 counter. If you do not specify the address of an output section in some
3423 other way (other ways are described later), the address is set from the
3424 current value of the location counter. The location counter is then
3425 incremented by the size of the output section. At the start of the
3426 @samp{SECTIONS} command, the location counter has the value @samp{0}.
3427
3428 The second line defines an output section, @samp{.text}. The colon is
3429 required syntax which may be ignored for now. Within the curly braces
3430 after the output section name, you list the names of the input sections
3431 which should be placed into this output section. The @samp{*} is a
3432 wildcard which matches any file name. The expression @samp{*(.text)}
3433 means all @samp{.text} input sections in all input files.
3434
3435 Since the location counter is @samp{0x10000} when the output section
3436 @samp{.text} is defined, the linker will set the address of the
3437 @samp{.text} section in the output file to be @samp{0x10000}.
3438
3439 The remaining lines define the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss} sections in
3440 the output file. The linker will place the @samp{.data} output section
3441 at address @samp{0x8000000}. After the linker places the @samp{.data}
3442 output section, the value of the location counter will be
3443 @samp{0x8000000} plus the size of the @samp{.data} output section. The
3444 effect is that the linker will place the @samp{.bss} output section
3445 immediately after the @samp{.data} output section in memory.
3446
3447 The linker will ensure that each output section has the required
3448 alignment, by increasing the location counter if necessary. In this
3449 example, the specified addresses for the @samp{.text} and @samp{.data}
3450 sections will probably satisfy any alignment constraints, but the linker
3451 may have to create a small gap between the @samp{.data} and @samp{.bss}
3452 sections.
3453
3454 That's it! That's a simple and complete linker script.
3455
3456 @node Simple Commands
3457 @section Simple Linker Script Commands
3458 @cindex linker script simple commands
3459 In this section we describe the simple linker script commands.
3460
3461 @menu
3462 * Entry Point:: Setting the entry point
3463 * File Commands:: Commands dealing with files
3464 @ifclear SingleFormat
3465 * Format Commands:: Commands dealing with object file formats
3466 @end ifclear
3467
3468 * REGION_ALIAS:: Assign alias names to memory regions
3469 * Miscellaneous Commands:: Other linker script commands
3470 @end menu
3471
3472 @node Entry Point
3473 @subsection Setting the Entry Point
3474 @kindex ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3475 @cindex start of execution
3476 @cindex first instruction
3477 @cindex entry point
3478 The first instruction to execute in a program is called the @dfn{entry
3479 point}. You can use the @code{ENTRY} linker script command to set the
3480 entry point. The argument is a symbol name:
3481 @smallexample
3482 ENTRY(@var{symbol})
3483 @end smallexample
3484
3485 There are several ways to set the entry point. The linker will set the
3486 entry point by trying each of the following methods in order, and
3487 stopping when one of them succeeds:
3488 @itemize @bullet
3489 @item
3490 the @samp{-e} @var{entry} command-line option;
3491 @item
3492 the @code{ENTRY(@var{symbol})} command in a linker script;
3493 @item
3494 the value of a target-specific symbol, if it is defined; For many
3495 targets this is @code{start}, but PE- and BeOS-based systems for example
3496 check a list of possible entry symbols, matching the first one found.
3497 @item
3498 the address of the first byte of the @samp{.text} section, if present;
3499 @item
3500 The address @code{0}.
3501 @end itemize
3502
3503 @node File Commands
3504 @subsection Commands Dealing with Files
3505 @cindex linker script file commands
3506 Several linker script commands deal with files.
3507
3508 @table @code
3509 @item INCLUDE @var{filename}
3510 @kindex INCLUDE @var{filename}
3511 @cindex including a linker script
3512 Include the linker script @var{filename} at this point. The file will
3513 be searched for in the current directory, and in any directory specified
3514 with the @option{-L} option. You can nest calls to @code{INCLUDE} up to
3515 10 levels deep.
3516
3517 You can place @code{INCLUDE} directives at the top level, in @code{MEMORY} or
3518 @code{SECTIONS} commands, or in output section descriptions.
3519
3520 @item INPUT(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3521 @itemx INPUT(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3522 @kindex INPUT(@var{files})
3523 @cindex input files in linker scripts
3524 @cindex input object files in linker scripts
3525 @cindex linker script input object files
3526 The @code{INPUT} command directs the linker to include the named files
3527 in the link, as though they were named on the command line.
3528
3529 For example, if you always want to include @file{subr.o} any time you do
3530 a link, but you can't be bothered to put it on every link command line,
3531 then you can put @samp{INPUT (subr.o)} in your linker script.
3532
3533 In fact, if you like, you can list all of your input files in the linker
3534 script, and then invoke the linker with nothing but a @samp{-T} option.
3535
3536 In case a @dfn{sysroot prefix} is configured, and the filename starts
3537 with the @samp{/} character, and the script being processed was
3538 located inside the @dfn{sysroot prefix}, the filename will be looked
3539 for in the @dfn{sysroot prefix}. Otherwise, the linker will try to
3540 open the file in the current directory. If it is not found, the
3541 linker will search through the archive library search path.
3542 The @dfn{sysroot prefix} can also be forced by specifying @code{=}
3543 as the first character in the filename path, or prefixing the filename
3544 path with @code{$SYSROOT}. See also the description of @samp{-L} in
3545 @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3546
3547 If you use @samp{INPUT (-l@var{file})}, @command{ld} will transform the
3548 name to @code{lib@var{file}.a}, as with the command-line argument
3549 @samp{-l}.
3550
3551 When you use the @code{INPUT} command in an implicit linker script, the
3552 files will be included in the link at the point at which the linker
3553 script file is included. This can affect archive searching.
3554
3555 @item GROUP(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3556 @itemx GROUP(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3557 @kindex GROUP(@var{files})
3558 @cindex grouping input files
3559 The @code{GROUP} command is like @code{INPUT}, except that the named
3560 files should all be archives, and they are searched repeatedly until no
3561 new undefined references are created. See the description of @samp{-(}
3562 in @ref{Options,,Command-line Options}.
3563
3564 @item AS_NEEDED(@var{file}, @var{file}, @dots{})
3565 @itemx AS_NEEDED(@var{file} @var{file} @dots{})
3566 @kindex AS_NEEDED(@var{files})
3567 This construct can appear only inside of the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP}
3568 commands, among other filenames. The files listed will be handled
3569 as if they appear directly in the @code{INPUT} or @code{GROUP} commands,
3570 with the exception of ELF shared libraries, that will be added only
3571 when they are actually needed. This construct essentially enables
3572 @option{--as-needed} option for all the files listed inside of it
3573 and restores previous @option{--as-needed} resp. @option{--no-as-needed}
3574 setting afterwards.
3575
3576 @item OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3577 @kindex OUTPUT(@var{filename})
3578 @cindex output file name in linker script
3579 The @code{OUTPUT} command names the output file. Using
3580 @code{OUTPUT(@var{filename})} in the linker script is exactly like using
3581 @samp{-o @var{filename}} on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command
3582 Line Options}). If both are used, the command-line option takes
3583 precedence.
3584
3585 You can use the @code{OUTPUT} command to define a default name for the
3586 output file other than the usual default of @file{a.out}.
3587
3588 @item SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3589 @kindex SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})
3590 @cindex library search path in linker script
3591 @cindex archive search path in linker script
3592 @cindex search path in linker script
3593 The @code{SEARCH_DIR} command adds @var{path} to the list of paths where
3594 @command{ld} looks for archive libraries. Using
3595 @code{SEARCH_DIR(@var{path})} is exactly like using @samp{-L @var{path}}
3596 on the command line (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both
3597 are used, then the linker will search both paths. Paths specified using
3598 the command-line option are searched first.
3599
3600 @item STARTUP(@var{filename})
3601 @kindex STARTUP(@var{filename})
3602 @cindex first input file
3603 The @code{STARTUP} command is just like the @code{INPUT} command, except
3604 that @var{filename} will become the first input file to be linked, as
3605 though it were specified first on the command line. This may be useful
3606 when using a system in which the entry point is always the start of the
3607 first file.
3608 @end table
3609
3610 @ifclear SingleFormat
3611 @node Format Commands
3612 @subsection Commands Dealing with Object File Formats
3613 A couple of linker script commands deal with object file formats.
3614
3615 @table @code
3616 @item OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3617 @itemx OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{default}, @var{big}, @var{little})
3618 @kindex OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})
3619 @cindex output file format in linker script
3620 The @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command names the BFD format to use for the
3621 output file (@pxref{BFD}). Using @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT(@var{bfdname})} is
3622 exactly like using @samp{--oformat @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3623 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If both are used, the command
3624 line option takes precedence.
3625
3626 You can use @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} with three arguments to use different
3627 formats based on the @samp{-EB} and @samp{-EL} command-line options.
3628 This permits the linker script to set the output format based on the
3629 desired endianness.
3630
3631 If neither @samp{-EB} nor @samp{-EL} are used, then the output format
3632 will be the first argument, @var{default}. If @samp{-EB} is used, the
3633 output format will be the second argument, @var{big}. If @samp{-EL} is
3634 used, the output format will be the third argument, @var{little}.
3635
3636 For example, the default linker script for the MIPS ELF target uses this
3637 command:
3638 @smallexample
3639 OUTPUT_FORMAT(elf32-bigmips, elf32-bigmips, elf32-littlemips)
3640 @end smallexample
3641 This says that the default format for the output file is
3642 @samp{elf32-bigmips}, but if the user uses the @samp{-EL} command-line
3643 option, the output file will be created in the @samp{elf32-littlemips}
3644 format.
3645
3646 @item TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3647 @kindex TARGET(@var{bfdname})
3648 @cindex input file format in linker script
3649 The @code{TARGET} command names the BFD format to use when reading input
3650 files. It affects subsequent @code{INPUT} and @code{GROUP} commands.
3651 This command is like using @samp{-b @var{bfdname}} on the command line
3652 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}). If the @code{TARGET} command
3653 is used but @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} is not, then the last @code{TARGET}
3654 command is also used to set the format for the output file. @xref{BFD}.
3655 @end table
3656 @end ifclear
3657
3658 @node REGION_ALIAS
3659 @subsection Assign alias names to memory regions
3660 @kindex REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3661 @cindex region alias
3662 @cindex region names
3663
3664 Alias names can be added to existing memory regions created with the
3665 @ref{MEMORY} command. Each name corresponds to at most one memory region.
3666
3667 @smallexample
3668 REGION_ALIAS(@var{alias}, @var{region})
3669 @end smallexample
3670
3671 The @code{REGION_ALIAS} function creates an alias name @var{alias} for the
3672 memory region @var{region}. This allows a flexible mapping of output sections
3673 to memory regions. An example follows.
3674
3675 Suppose we have an application for embedded systems which come with various
3676 memory storage devices. All have a general purpose, volatile memory @code{RAM}
3677 that allows code execution or data storage. Some may have a read-only,
3678 non-volatile memory @code{ROM} that allows code execution and read-only data
3679 access. The last variant is a read-only, non-volatile memory @code{ROM2} with
3680 read-only data access and no code execution capability. We have four output
3681 sections:
3682
3683 @itemize @bullet
3684 @item
3685 @code{.text} program code;
3686 @item
3687 @code{.rodata} read-only data;
3688 @item
3689 @code{.data} read-write initialized data;
3690 @item
3691 @code{.bss} read-write zero initialized data.
3692 @end itemize
3693
3694 The goal is to provide a linker command file that contains a system independent
3695 part defining the output sections and a system dependent part mapping the
3696 output sections to the memory regions available on the system. Our embedded
3697 systems come with three different memory setups @code{A}, @code{B} and
3698 @code{C}:
3699 @multitable @columnfractions .25 .25 .25 .25
3700 @item Section @tab Variant A @tab Variant B @tab Variant C
3701 @item .text @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM
3702 @item .rodata @tab RAM @tab ROM @tab ROM2
3703 @item .data @tab RAM @tab RAM/ROM @tab RAM/ROM2
3704 @item .bss @tab RAM @tab RAM @tab RAM
3705 @end multitable
3706 The notation @code{RAM/ROM} or @code{RAM/ROM2} means that this section is
3707 loaded into region @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} respectively. Please note that
3708 the load address of the @code{.data} section starts in all three variants at
3709 the end of the @code{.rodata} section.
3710
3711 The base linker script that deals with the output sections follows. It
3712 includes the system dependent @code{linkcmds.memory} file that describes the
3713 memory layout:
3714 @smallexample
3715 INCLUDE linkcmds.memory
3716
3717 SECTIONS
3718 @{
3719 .text :
3720 @{
3721 *(.text)
3722 @} > REGION_TEXT
3723 .rodata :
3724 @{
3725 *(.rodata)
3726 rodata_end = .;
3727 @} > REGION_RODATA
3728 .data : AT (rodata_end)
3729 @{
3730 data_start = .;
3731 *(.data)
3732 @} > REGION_DATA
3733 data_size = SIZEOF(.data);
3734 data_load_start = LOADADDR(.data);
3735 .bss :
3736 @{
3737 *(.bss)
3738 @} > REGION_BSS
3739 @}
3740 @end smallexample
3741
3742 Now we need three different @code{linkcmds.memory} files to define memory
3743 regions and alias names. The content of @code{linkcmds.memory} for the three
3744 variants @code{A}, @code{B} and @code{C}:
3745 @table @code
3746 @item A
3747 Here everything goes into the @code{RAM}.
3748 @smallexample
3749 MEMORY
3750 @{
3751 RAM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 4M
3752 @}
3753
3754 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", RAM);
3755 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", RAM);
3756 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3757 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3758 @end smallexample
3759 @item B
3760 Program code and read-only data go into the @code{ROM}. Read-write data goes
3761 into the @code{RAM}. An image of the initialized data is loaded into the
3762 @code{ROM} and will be copied during system start into the @code{RAM}.
3763 @smallexample
3764 MEMORY
3765 @{
3766 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 3M
3767 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3768 @}
3769
3770 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3771 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM);
3772 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3773 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3774 @end smallexample
3775 @item C
3776 Program code goes into the @code{ROM}. Read-only data goes into the
3777 @code{ROM2}. Read-write data goes into the @code{RAM}. An image of the
3778 initialized data is loaded into the @code{ROM2} and will be copied during
3779 system start into the @code{RAM}.
3780 @smallexample
3781 MEMORY
3782 @{
3783 ROM : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 2M
3784 ROM2 : ORIGIN = 0x10000000, LENGTH = 1M
3785 RAM : ORIGIN = 0x20000000, LENGTH = 1M
3786 @}
3787
3788 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_TEXT", ROM);
3789 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_RODATA", ROM2);
3790 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_DATA", RAM);
3791 REGION_ALIAS("REGION_BSS", RAM);
3792 @end smallexample
3793 @end table
3794
3795 It is possible to write a common system initialization routine to copy the
3796 @code{.data} section from @code{ROM} or @code{ROM2} into the @code{RAM} if
3797 necessary:
3798 @smallexample
3799 #include <string.h>
3800
3801 extern char data_start [];
3802 extern char data_size [];
3803 extern char data_load_start [];
3804
3805 void copy_data(void)
3806 @{
3807 if (data_start != data_load_start)
3808 @{
3809 memcpy(data_start, data_load_start, (size_t) data_size);
3810 @}
3811 @}
3812 @end smallexample
3813
3814 @node Miscellaneous Commands
3815 @subsection Other Linker Script Commands
3816 There are a few other linker scripts commands.
3817
3818 @table @code
3819 @item ASSERT(@var{exp}, @var{message})
3820 @kindex ASSERT
3821 @cindex assertion in linker script
3822 Ensure that @var{exp} is non-zero. If it is zero, then exit the linker
3823 with an error code, and print @var{message}.
3824
3825 Note that assertions are checked before the final stages of linking
3826 take place. This means that expressions involving symbols PROVIDEd
3827 inside section definitions will fail if the user has not set values
3828 for those symbols. The only exception to this rule is PROVIDEd
3829 symbols that just reference dot. Thus an assertion like this:
3830
3831 @smallexample
3832 .stack :
3833 @{
3834 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3835 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3836 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3837 @}
3838 @end smallexample
3839
3840 will fail if @code{__stack_size} is not defined elsewhere. Symbols
3841 PROVIDEd outside of section definitions are evaluated earlier, so they
3842 can be used inside ASSERTions. Thus:
3843
3844 @smallexample
3845 PROVIDE (__stack_size = 0x100);
3846 .stack :
3847 @{
3848 PROVIDE (__stack = .);
3849 ASSERT ((__stack > (_end + __stack_size)), "Error: No room left for the stack");
3850 @}
3851 @end smallexample
3852
3853 will work.
3854
3855 @item EXTERN(@var{symbol} @var{symbol} @dots{})
3856 @kindex EXTERN
3857 @cindex undefined symbol in linker script
3858 Force @var{symbol} to be entered in the output file as an undefined
3859 symbol. Doing this may, for example, trigger linking of additional
3860 modules from standard libraries. You may list several @var{symbol}s for
3861 each @code{EXTERN}, and you may use @code{EXTERN} multiple times. This
3862 command has the same effect as the @samp{-u} command-line option.
3863
3864 @item FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3865 @kindex FORCE_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3866 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3867 This command has the same effect as the @samp{-d} command-line option:
3868 to make @command{ld} assign space to common symbols even if a relocatable
3869 output file is specified (@samp{-r}).
3870
3871 @item INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3872 @kindex INHIBIT_COMMON_ALLOCATION
3873 @cindex common allocation in linker script
3874 This command has the same effect as the @samp{--no-define-common}
3875 command-line option: to make @code{ld} omit the assignment of addresses
3876 to common symbols even for a non-relocatable output file.
3877
3878 @item FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3879 @kindex FORCE_GROUP_ALLOCATION
3880 @cindex group allocation in linker script
3881 @cindex section groups
3882 @cindex COMDAT
3883 This command has the same effect as the
3884 @samp{--force-group-allocation} command-line option: to make
3885 @command{ld} place section group members like normal input sections,
3886 and to delete the section groups even if a relocatable output file is
3887 specified (@samp{-r}).
3888
3889 @item INSERT [ AFTER | BEFORE ] @var{output_section}
3890 @kindex INSERT
3891 @cindex insert user script into default script
3892 This command is typically used in a script specified by @samp{-T} to
3893 augment the default @code{SECTIONS} with, for example, overlays. It
3894 inserts all prior linker script statements after (or before)
3895 @var{output_section}, and also causes @samp{-T} to not override the
3896 default linker script. The exact insertion point is as for orphan
3897 sections. @xref{Location Counter}. The insertion happens after the
3898 linker has mapped input sections to output sections. Prior to the
3899 insertion, since @samp{-T} scripts are parsed before the default
3900 linker script, statements in the @samp{-T} script occur before the
3901 default linker script statements in the internal linker representation
3902 of the script. In particular, input section assignments will be made
3903 to @samp{-T} output sections before those in the default script. Here
3904 is an example of how a @samp{-T} script using @code{INSERT} might look:
3905
3906 @smallexample
3907 SECTIONS
3908 @{
3909 OVERLAY :
3910 @{
3911 .ov1 @{ ov1*(.text) @}
3912 .ov2 @{ ov2*(.text) @}
3913 @}
3914 @}
3915 INSERT AFTER .text;
3916 @end smallexample
3917
3918 @item NOCROSSREFS(@var{section} @var{section} @dots{})
3919 @kindex NOCROSSREFS(@var{sections})
3920 @cindex cross references
3921 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3922 references among certain output sections.
3923
3924 In certain types of programs, particularly on embedded systems when
3925 using overlays, when one section is loaded into memory, another section
3926 will not be. Any direct references between the two sections would be
3927 errors. For example, it would be an error if code in one section called
3928 a function defined in the other section.
3929
3930 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command takes a list of output section names. If
3931 @command{ld} detects any cross references between the sections, it reports
3932 an error and returns a non-zero exit status. Note that the
3933 @code{NOCROSSREFS} command uses output section names, not input section
3934 names.
3935
3936 @item NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsection} @dots{})
3937 @kindex NOCROSSREFS_TO(@var{tosection} @var{fromsections})
3938 @cindex cross references
3939 This command may be used to tell @command{ld} to issue an error about any
3940 references to one section from a list of other sections.
3941
3942 The @code{NOCROSSREFS} command is useful when ensuring that two or more
3943 output sections are entirely independent but there are situations where
3944 a one-way dependency is needed. For example, in a multi-core application
3945 there may be shared code that can be called from each core but for safety
3946 must never call back.
3947
3948 The @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command takes a list of output section names.
3949 The first section can not be referenced from any of the other sections.
3950 If @command{ld} detects any references to the first section from any of
3951 the other sections, it reports an error and returns a non-zero exit
3952 status. Note that the @code{NOCROSSREFS_TO} command uses output section
3953 names, not input section names.
3954
3955 @ifclear SingleFormat
3956 @item OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3957 @kindex OUTPUT_ARCH(@var{bfdarch})
3958 @cindex machine architecture
3959 @cindex architecture
3960 Specify a particular output machine architecture. The argument is one
3961 of the names used by the BFD library (@pxref{BFD}). You can see the
3962 architecture of an object file by using the @code{objdump} program with
3963 the @samp{-f} option.
3964 @end ifclear
3965
3966 @item LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3967 @kindex LD_FEATURE(@var{string})
3968 This command may be used to modify @command{ld} behavior. If
3969 @var{string} is @code{"SANE_EXPR"} then absolute symbols and numbers
3970 in a script are simply treated as numbers everywhere.
3971 @xref{Expression Section}.
3972 @end table
3973
3974 @node Assignments
3975 @section Assigning Values to Symbols
3976 @cindex assignment in scripts
3977 @cindex symbol definition, scripts
3978 @cindex variables, defining
3979 You may assign a value to a symbol in a linker script. This will define
3980 the symbol and place it into the symbol table with a global scope.
3981
3982 @menu
3983 * Simple Assignments:: Simple Assignments
3984 * HIDDEN:: HIDDEN
3985 * PROVIDE:: PROVIDE
3986 * PROVIDE_HIDDEN:: PROVIDE_HIDDEN
3987 * Source Code Reference:: How to use a linker script defined symbol in source code
3988 @end menu
3989
3990 @node Simple Assignments
3991 @subsection Simple Assignments
3992
3993 You may assign to a symbol using any of the C assignment operators:
3994
3995 @table @code
3996 @item @var{symbol} = @var{expression} ;
3997 @itemx @var{symbol} += @var{expression} ;
3998 @itemx @var{symbol} -= @var{expression} ;
3999 @itemx @var{symbol} *= @var{expression} ;
4000 @itemx @var{symbol} /= @var{expression} ;
4001 @itemx @var{symbol} <<= @var{expression} ;
4002 @itemx @var{symbol} >>= @var{expression} ;
4003 @itemx @var{symbol} &= @var{expression} ;
4004 @itemx @var{symbol} |= @var{expression} ;
4005 @end table
4006
4007 The first case will define @var{symbol} to the value of
4008 @var{expression}. In the other cases, @var{symbol} must already be
4009 defined, and the value will be adjusted accordingly.
4010
4011 The special symbol name @samp{.} indicates the location counter. You
4012 may only use this within a @code{SECTIONS} command. @xref{Location Counter}.
4013
4014 The semicolon after @var{expression} is required.
4015
4016 Expressions are defined below; see @ref{Expressions}.
4017
4018 You may write symbol assignments as commands in their own right, or as
4019 statements within a @code{SECTIONS} command, or as part of an output
4020 section description in a @code{SECTIONS} command.
4021
4022 The section of the symbol will be set from the section of the
4023 expression; for more information, see @ref{Expression Section}.
4024
4025 Here is an example showing the three different places that symbol
4026 assignments may be used:
4027
4028 @smallexample
4029 floating_point = 0;
4030 SECTIONS
4031 @{
4032 .text :
4033 @{
4034 *(.text)
4035 _etext = .;
4036 @}
4037 _bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3;
4038 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4039 @}
4040 @end smallexample
4041 @noindent
4042 In this example, the symbol @samp{floating_point} will be defined as
4043 zero. The symbol @samp{_etext} will be defined as the address following
4044 the last @samp{.text} input section. The symbol @samp{_bdata} will be
4045 defined as the address following the @samp{.text} output section aligned
4046 upward to a 4 byte boundary.
4047
4048 @node HIDDEN
4049 @subsection HIDDEN
4050 @cindex HIDDEN
4051 For ELF targeted ports, define a symbol that will be hidden and won't be
4052 exported. The syntax is @code{HIDDEN(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4053
4054 Here is the example from @ref{Simple Assignments}, rewritten to use
4055 @code{HIDDEN}:
4056
4057 @smallexample
4058 HIDDEN(floating_point = 0);
4059 SECTIONS
4060 @{
4061 .text :
4062 @{
4063 *(.text)
4064 HIDDEN(_etext = .);
4065 @}
4066 HIDDEN(_bdata = (. + 3) & ~ 3);
4067 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4068 @}
4069 @end smallexample
4070 @noindent
4071 In this case none of the three symbols will be visible outside this module.
4072
4073 @node PROVIDE
4074 @subsection PROVIDE
4075 @cindex PROVIDE
4076 In some cases, it is desirable for a linker script to define a symbol
4077 only if it is referenced and is not defined by any object included in
4078 the link. For example, traditional linkers defined the symbol
4079 @samp{etext}. However, ANSI C requires that the user be able to use
4080 @samp{etext} as a function name without encountering an error. The
4081 @code{PROVIDE} keyword may be used to define a symbol, such as
4082 @samp{etext}, only if it is referenced but not defined. The syntax is
4083 @code{PROVIDE(@var{symbol} = @var{expression})}.
4084
4085 Here is an example of using @code{PROVIDE} to define @samp{etext}:
4086 @smallexample
4087 SECTIONS
4088 @{
4089 .text :
4090 @{
4091 *(.text)
4092 _etext = .;
4093 PROVIDE(etext = .);
4094 @}
4095 @}
4096 @end smallexample
4097
4098 In this example, if the program defines @samp{_etext} (with a leading
4099 underscore), the linker will give a multiple definition error. If, on
4100 the other hand, the program defines @samp{etext} (with no leading
4101 underscore), the linker will silently use the definition in the program.
4102 If the program references @samp{etext} but does not define it, the
4103 linker will use the definition in the linker script.
4104
4105 Note - the @code{PROVIDE} directive considers a common symbol to be
4106 defined, even though such a symbol could be combined with the symbol
4107 that the @code{PROVIDE} would create. This is particularly important
4108 when considering constructor and destructor list symbols such as
4109 @samp{__CTOR_LIST__} as these are often defined as common symbols.
4110
4111 @node PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4112 @subsection PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4113 @cindex PROVIDE_HIDDEN
4114 Similar to @code{PROVIDE}. For ELF targeted ports, the symbol will be
4115 hidden and won't be exported.
4116
4117 @node Source Code Reference
4118 @subsection Source Code Reference
4119
4120 Accessing a linker script defined variable from source code is not
4121 intuitive. In particular a linker script symbol is not equivalent to
4122 a variable declaration in a high level language, it is instead a
4123 symbol that does not have a value.
4124
4125 Before going further, it is important to note that compilers often
4126 transform names in the source code into different names when they are
4127 stored in the symbol table. For example, Fortran compilers commonly
4128 prepend or append an underscore, and C++ performs extensive @samp{name
4129 mangling}. Therefore there might be a discrepancy between the name
4130 of a variable as it is used in source code and the name of the same
4131 variable as it is defined in a linker script. For example in C a
4132 linker script variable might be referred to as:
4133
4134 @smallexample
4135 extern int foo;
4136 @end smallexample
4137
4138 But in the linker script it might be defined as:
4139
4140 @smallexample
4141 _foo = 1000;
4142 @end smallexample
4143
4144 In the remaining examples however it is assumed that no name
4145 transformation has taken place.
4146
4147 When a symbol is declared in a high level language such as C, two
4148 things happen. The first is that the compiler reserves enough space
4149 in the program's memory to hold the @emph{value} of the symbol. The
4150 second is that the compiler creates an entry in the program's symbol
4151 table which holds the symbol's @emph{address}. ie the symbol table
4152 contains the address of the block of memory holding the symbol's
4153 value. So for example the following C declaration, at file scope:
4154
4155 @smallexample
4156 int foo = 1000;
4157 @end smallexample
4158
4159 creates an entry called @samp{foo} in the symbol table. This entry
4160 holds the address of an @samp{int} sized block of memory where the
4161 number 1000 is initially stored.
4162
4163 When a program references a symbol the compiler generates code that
4164 first accesses the symbol table to find the address of the symbol's
4165 memory block and then code to read the value from that memory block.
4166 So:
4167
4168 @smallexample
4169 foo = 1;
4170 @end smallexample
4171
4172 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets the address
4173 associated with this symbol and then writes the value 1 into that
4174 address. Whereas:
4175
4176 @smallexample
4177 int * a = & foo;
4178 @end smallexample
4179
4180 looks up the symbol @samp{foo} in the symbol table, gets its address
4181 and then copies this address into the block of memory associated with
4182 the variable @samp{a}.
4183
4184 Linker scripts symbol declarations, by contrast, create an entry in
4185 the symbol table but do not assign any memory to them. Thus they are
4186 an address without a value. So for example the linker script definition:
4187
4188 @smallexample
4189 foo = 1000;
4190 @end smallexample
4191
4192 creates an entry in the symbol table called @samp{foo} which holds
4193 the address of memory location 1000, but nothing special is stored at
4194 address 1000. This means that you cannot access the @emph{value} of a
4195 linker script defined symbol - it has no value - all you can do is
4196 access the @emph{address} of a linker script defined symbol.
4197
4198 Hence when you are using a linker script defined symbol in source code
4199 you should always take the address of the symbol, and never attempt to
4200 use its value. For example suppose you want to copy the contents of a
4201 section of memory called .ROM into a section called .FLASH and the
4202 linker script contains these declarations:
4203
4204 @smallexample
4205 @group
4206 start_of_ROM = .ROM;
4207 end_of_ROM = .ROM + sizeof (.ROM);
4208 start_of_FLASH = .FLASH;
4209 @end group
4210 @end smallexample
4211
4212 Then the C source code to perform the copy would be:
4213
4214 @smallexample
4215 @group
4216 extern char start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM, start_of_FLASH;
4217
4218 memcpy (& start_of_FLASH, & start_of_ROM, & end_of_ROM - & start_of_ROM);
4219 @end group
4220 @end smallexample
4221
4222 Note the use of the @samp{&} operators. These are correct.
4223 Alternatively the symbols can be treated as the names of vectors or
4224 arrays and then the code will again work as expected:
4225
4226 @smallexample
4227 @group
4228 extern char start_of_ROM[], end_of_ROM[], start_of_FLASH[];
4229
4230 memcpy (start_of_FLASH, start_of_ROM, end_of_ROM - start_of_ROM);
4231 @end group
4232 @end smallexample
4233
4234 Note how using this method does not require the use of @samp{&}
4235 operators.
4236
4237 @node SECTIONS
4238 @section SECTIONS Command
4239 @kindex SECTIONS
4240 The @code{SECTIONS} command tells the linker how to map input sections
4241 into output sections, and how to place the output sections in memory.
4242
4243 The format of the @code{SECTIONS} command is:
4244 @smallexample
4245 SECTIONS
4246 @{
4247 @var{sections-command}
4248 @var{sections-command}
4249 @dots{}
4250 @}
4251 @end smallexample
4252
4253 Each @var{sections-command} may of be one of the following:
4254
4255 @itemize @bullet
4256 @item
4257 an @code{ENTRY} command (@pxref{Entry Point,,Entry command})
4258 @item
4259 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4260 @item
4261 an output section description
4262 @item
4263 an overlay description
4264 @end itemize
4265
4266 The @code{ENTRY} command and symbol assignments are permitted inside the
4267 @code{SECTIONS} command for convenience in using the location counter in
4268 those commands. This can also make the linker script easier to
4269 understand because you can use those commands at meaningful points in
4270 the layout of the output file.
4271
4272 Output section descriptions and overlay descriptions are described
4273 below.
4274
4275 If you do not use a @code{SECTIONS} command in your linker script, the
4276 linker will place each input section into an identically named output
4277 section in the order that the sections are first encountered in the
4278 input files. If all input sections are present in the first file, for
4279 example, the order of sections in the output file will match the order
4280 in the first input file. The first section will be at address zero.
4281
4282 @menu
4283 * Output Section Description:: Output section description
4284 * Output Section Name:: Output section name
4285 * Output Section Address:: Output section address
4286 * Input Section:: Input section description
4287 * Output Section Data:: Output section data
4288 * Output Section Keywords:: Output section keywords
4289 * Output Section Discarding:: Output section discarding
4290 * Output Section Attributes:: Output section attributes
4291 * Overlay Description:: Overlay description
4292 @end menu
4293
4294 @node Output Section Description
4295 @subsection Output Section Description
4296 The full description of an output section looks like this:
4297 @smallexample
4298 @group
4299 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
4300 [AT(@var{lma})]
4301 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
4302 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
4303 [@var{constraint}]
4304 @{
4305 @var{output-section-command}
4306 @var{output-section-command}
4307 @dots{}
4308 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}] [,]
4309 @end group
4310 @end smallexample
4311
4312 Most output sections do not use most of the optional section attributes.
4313
4314 The whitespace around @var{section} is required, so that the section
4315 name is unambiguous. The colon and the curly braces are also required.
4316 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fillexp} is used and
4317 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
4318 The line breaks and other white space are optional.
4319
4320 Each @var{output-section-command} may be one of the following:
4321
4322 @itemize @bullet
4323 @item
4324 a symbol assignment (@pxref{Assignments})
4325 @item
4326 an input section description (@pxref{Input Section})
4327 @item
4328 data values to include directly (@pxref{Output Section Data})
4329 @item
4330 a special output section keyword (@pxref{Output Section Keywords})
4331 @end itemize
4332
4333 @node Output Section Name
4334 @subsection Output Section Name
4335 @cindex name, section
4336 @cindex section name
4337 The name of the output section is @var{section}. @var{section} must
4338 meet the constraints of your output format. In formats which only
4339 support a limited number of sections, such as @code{a.out}, the name
4340 must be one of the names supported by the format (@code{a.out}, for
4341 example, allows only @samp{.text}, @samp{.data} or @samp{.bss}). If the
4342 output format supports any number of sections, but with numbers and not
4343 names (as is the case for Oasys), the name should be supplied as a
4344 quoted numeric string. A section name may consist of any sequence of
4345 characters, but a name which contains any unusual characters such as
4346 commas must be quoted.
4347
4348 The output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} is special; @ref{Output Section
4349 Discarding}.
4350
4351 @node Output Section Address
4352 @subsection Output Section Address
4353 @cindex address, section
4354 @cindex section address
4355 The @var{address} is an expression for the VMA (the virtual memory
4356 address) of the output section. This address is optional, but if it
4357 is provided then the output address will be set exactly as specified.
4358
4359 If the output address is not specified then one will be chosen for the
4360 section, based on the heuristic below. This address will be adjusted
4361 to fit the alignment requirement of the output section. The
4362 alignment requirement is the strictest alignment of any input section
4363 contained within the output section.
4364
4365 The output section address heuristic is as follows:
4366
4367 @itemize @bullet
4368 @item
4369 If an output memory @var{region} is set for the section then it
4370 is added to this region and its address will be the next free address
4371 in that region.
4372
4373 @item
4374 If the MEMORY command has been used to create a list of memory
4375 regions then the first region which has attributes compatible with the
4376 section is selected to contain it. The section's output address will
4377 be the next free address in that region; @ref{MEMORY}.
4378
4379 @item
4380 If no memory regions were specified, or none match the section then
4381 the output address will be based on the current value of the location
4382 counter.
4383 @end itemize
4384
4385 @noindent
4386 For example:
4387
4388 @smallexample
4389 .text . : @{ *(.text) @}
4390 @end smallexample
4391
4392 @noindent
4393 and
4394
4395 @smallexample
4396 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4397 @end smallexample
4398
4399 @noindent
4400 are subtly different. The first will set the address of the
4401 @samp{.text} output section to the current value of the location
4402 counter. The second will set it to the current value of the location
4403 counter aligned to the strictest alignment of any of the @samp{.text}
4404 input sections.
4405
4406 The @var{address} may be an arbitrary expression; @ref{Expressions}.
4407 For example, if you want to align the section on a 0x10 byte boundary,
4408 so that the lowest four bits of the section address are zero, you could
4409 do something like this:
4410 @smallexample
4411 .text ALIGN(0x10) : @{ *(.text) @}
4412 @end smallexample
4413 @noindent
4414 This works because @code{ALIGN} returns the current location counter
4415 aligned upward to the specified value.
4416
4417 Specifying @var{address} for a section will change the value of the
4418 location counter, provided that the section is non-empty. (Empty
4419 sections are ignored).
4420
4421 @node Input Section
4422 @subsection Input Section Description
4423 @cindex input sections
4424 @cindex mapping input sections to output sections
4425 The most common output section command is an input section description.
4426
4427 The input section description is the most basic linker script operation.
4428 You use output sections to tell the linker how to lay out your program
4429 in memory. You use input section descriptions to tell the linker how to
4430 map the input files into your memory layout.
4431
4432 @menu
4433 * Input Section Basics:: Input section basics
4434 * Input Section Wildcards:: Input section wildcard patterns
4435 * Input Section Common:: Input section for common symbols
4436 * Input Section Keep:: Input section and garbage collection
4437 * Input Section Example:: Input section example
4438 @end menu
4439
4440 @node Input Section Basics
4441 @subsubsection Input Section Basics
4442 @cindex input section basics
4443 An input section description consists of a file name optionally followed
4444 by a list of section names in parentheses.
4445
4446 The file name and the section name may be wildcard patterns, which we
4447 describe further below (@pxref{Input Section Wildcards}).
4448
4449 The most common input section description is to include all input
4450 sections with a particular name in the output section. For example, to
4451 include all input @samp{.text} sections, you would write:
4452 @smallexample
4453 *(.text)
4454 @end smallexample
4455 @noindent
4456 Here the @samp{*} is a wildcard which matches any file name. To exclude a list
4457 @cindex EXCLUDE_FILE
4458 of files from matching the file name wildcard, EXCLUDE_FILE may be used to
4459 match all files except the ones specified in the EXCLUDE_FILE list. For
4460 example:
4461 @smallexample
4462 EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) *(.ctors)
4463 @end smallexample
4464 @noindent
4465 will cause all .ctors sections from all files except @file{crtend.o}
4466 and @file{otherfile.o} to be included. The EXCLUDE_FILE can also be
4467 placed inside the section list, for example:
4468 @smallexample
4469 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*crtend.o *otherfile.o) .ctors)
4470 @end smallexample
4471 @noindent
4472 The result of this is identically to the previous example. Supporting
4473 two syntaxes for EXCLUDE_FILE is useful if the section list contains
4474 more than one section, as described below.
4475
4476 There are two ways to include more than one section:
4477 @smallexample
4478 *(.text .rdata)
4479 *(.text) *(.rdata)
4480 @end smallexample
4481 @noindent
4482 The difference between these is the order in which the @samp{.text} and
4483 @samp{.rdata} input sections will appear in the output section. In the
4484 first example, they will be intermingled, appearing in the same order as
4485 they are found in the linker input. In the second example, all
4486 @samp{.text} input sections will appear first, followed by all
4487 @samp{.rdata} input sections.
4488
4489 When using EXCLUDE_FILE with more than one section, if the exclusion
4490 is within the section list then the exclusion only applies to the
4491 immediately following section, for example:
4492 @smallexample
4493 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text .rdata)
4494 @end smallexample
4495 @noindent
4496 will cause all @samp{.text} sections from all files except
4497 @file{somefile.o} to be included, while all @samp{.rdata} sections
4498 from all files, including @file{somefile.o}, will be included. To
4499 exclude the @samp{.rdata} sections from @file{somefile.o} the example
4500 could be modified to:
4501 @smallexample
4502 *(EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .text EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) .rdata)
4503 @end smallexample
4504 @noindent
4505 Alternatively, placing the EXCLUDE_FILE outside of the section list,
4506 before the input file selection, will cause the exclusion to apply for
4507 all sections. Thus the previous example can be rewritten as:
4508 @smallexample
4509 EXCLUDE_FILE (*somefile.o) *(.text .rdata)
4510 @end smallexample
4511
4512 You can specify a file name to include sections from a particular file.
4513 You would do this if one or more of your files contain special data that
4514 needs to be at a particular location in memory. For example:
4515 @smallexample
4516 data.o(.data)
4517 @end smallexample
4518
4519 To refine the sections that are included based on the section flags
4520 of an input section, INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS may be used.
4521
4522 Here is a simple example for using Section header flags for ELF sections:
4523
4524 @smallexample
4525 @group
4526 SECTIONS @{
4527 .text : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (SHF_MERGE & SHF_STRINGS) *(.text) @}
4528 .text2 : @{ INPUT_SECTION_FLAGS (!SHF_WRITE) *(.text) @}
4529 @}
4530 @end group
4531 @end smallexample
4532
4533 In this example, the output section @samp{.text} will be comprised of any
4534 input section matching the name *(.text) whose section header flags
4535 @code{SHF_MERGE} and @code{SHF_STRINGS} are set. The output section
4536 @samp{.text2} will be comprised of any input section matching the name *(.text)
4537 whose section header flag @code{SHF_WRITE} is clear.
4538
4539 You can also specify files within archives by writing a pattern
4540 matching the archive, a colon, then the pattern matching the file,
4541 with no whitespace around the colon.
4542
4543 @table @samp
4544 @item archive:file
4545 matches file within archive
4546 @item archive:
4547 matches the whole archive
4548 @item :file
4549 matches file but not one in an archive
4550 @end table
4551
4552 Either one or both of @samp{archive} and @samp{file} can contain shell
4553 wildcards. On DOS based file systems, the linker will assume that a
4554 single letter followed by a colon is a drive specifier, so
4555 @samp{c:myfile.o} is a simple file specification, not @samp{myfile.o}
4556 within an archive called @samp{c}. @samp{archive:file} filespecs may
4557 also be used within an @code{EXCLUDE_FILE} list, but may not appear in
4558 other linker script contexts. For instance, you cannot extract a file
4559 from an archive by using @samp{archive:file} in an @code{INPUT}
4560 command.
4561
4562 If you use a file name without a list of sections, then all sections in
4563 the input file will be included in the output section. This is not
4564 commonly done, but it may by useful on occasion. For example:
4565 @smallexample
4566 data.o
4567 @end smallexample
4568
4569 When you use a file name which is not an @samp{archive:file} specifier
4570 and does not contain any wild card
4571 characters, the linker will first see if you also specified the file
4572 name on the linker command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. If you
4573 did not, the linker will attempt to open the file as an input file, as
4574 though it appeared on the command line. Note that this differs from an
4575 @code{INPUT} command, because the linker will not search for the file in
4576 the archive search path.
4577
4578 @node Input Section Wildcards
4579 @subsubsection Input Section Wildcard Patterns
4580 @cindex input section wildcards
4581 @cindex wildcard file name patterns
4582 @cindex file name wildcard patterns
4583 @cindex section name wildcard patterns
4584 In an input section description, either the file name or the section
4585 name or both may be wildcard patterns.
4586
4587 The file name of @samp{*} seen in many examples is a simple wildcard
4588 pattern for the file name.
4589
4590 The wildcard patterns are like those used by the Unix shell.
4591
4592 @table @samp
4593 @item *
4594 matches any number of characters
4595 @item ?
4596 matches any single character
4597 @item [@var{chars}]
4598 matches a single instance of any of the @var{chars}; the @samp{-}
4599 character may be used to specify a range of characters, as in
4600 @samp{[a-z]} to match any lower case letter
4601 @item \
4602 quotes the following character
4603 @end table
4604
4605 When a file name is matched with a wildcard, the wildcard characters
4606 will not match a @samp{/} character (used to separate directory names on
4607 Unix). A pattern consisting of a single @samp{*} character is an
4608 exception; it will always match any file name, whether it contains a
4609 @samp{/} or not. In a section name, the wildcard characters will match
4610 a @samp{/} character.
4611
4612 File name wildcard patterns only match files which are explicitly
4613 specified on the command line or in an @code{INPUT} command. The linker
4614 does not search directories to expand wildcards.
4615
4616 If a file name matches more than one wildcard pattern, or if a file name
4617 appears explicitly and is also matched by a wildcard pattern, the linker
4618 will use the first match in the linker script. For example, this
4619 sequence of input section descriptions is probably in error, because the
4620 @file{data.o} rule will not be used:
4621 @smallexample
4622 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4623 .data1 : @{ data.o(.data) @}
4624 @end smallexample
4625
4626 @cindex SORT_BY_NAME
4627 Normally, the linker will place files and sections matched by wildcards
4628 in the order in which they are seen during the link. You can change
4629 this by using the @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword, which appears before a wildcard
4630 pattern in parentheses (e.g., @code{SORT_BY_NAME(.text*)}). When the
4631 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} keyword is used, the linker will sort the files or sections
4632 into ascending order by name before placing them in the output file.
4633
4634 @cindex SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT
4635 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} is similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4636 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} will sort sections into descending order of
4637 alignment before placing them in the output file. Placing larger
4638 alignments before smaller alignments can reduce the amount of padding
4639 needed.
4640
4641 @cindex SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY
4642 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} is also similar to @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4643 @code{SORT_BY_INIT_PRIORITY} will sort sections into ascending
4644 numerical order of the GCC init_priority attribute encoded in the
4645 section name before placing them in the output file. In
4646 @code{.init_array.NNNNN} and @code{.fini_array.NNNNN}, @code{NNNNN} is
4647 the init_priority. In @code{.ctors.NNNNN} and @code{.dtors.NNNNN},
4648 @code{NNNNN} is 65535 minus the init_priority.
4649
4650 @cindex SORT
4651 @code{SORT} is an alias for @code{SORT_BY_NAME}.
4652
4653 When there are nested section sorting commands in linker script, there
4654 can be at most 1 level of nesting for section sorting commands.
4655
4656 @enumerate
4657 @item
4658 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4659 It will sort the input sections by name first, then by alignment if two
4660 sections have the same name.
4661 @item
4662 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4663 It will sort the input sections by alignment first, then by name if two
4664 sections have the same alignment.
4665 @item
4666 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)) is
4667 treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern).
4668 @item
4669 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern))
4670 is treated the same as @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern).
4671 @item
4672 All other nested section sorting commands are invalid.
4673 @end enumerate
4674
4675 When both command-line section sorting option and linker script
4676 section sorting command are used, section sorting command always
4677 takes precedence over the command-line option.
4678
4679 If the section sorting command in linker script isn't nested, the
4680 command-line option will make the section sorting command to be
4681 treated as nested sorting command.
4682
4683 @enumerate
4684 @item
4685 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern ) with
4686 @option{--sort-sections alignment} is equivalent to
4687 @code{SORT_BY_NAME} (@code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern)).
4688 @item
4689 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (wildcard section pattern) with
4690 @option{--sort-section name} is equivalent to
4691 @code{SORT_BY_ALIGNMENT} (@code{SORT_BY_NAME} (wildcard section pattern)).
4692 @end enumerate
4693
4694 If the section sorting command in linker script is nested, the
4695 command-line option will be ignored.
4696
4697 @cindex SORT_NONE
4698 @code{SORT_NONE} disables section sorting by ignoring the command-line
4699 section sorting option.
4700
4701 If you ever get confused about where input sections are going, use the
4702 @samp{-M} linker option to generate a map file. The map file shows
4703 precisely how input sections are mapped to output sections.
4704
4705 This example shows how wildcard patterns might be used to partition
4706 files. This linker script directs the linker to place all @samp{.text}
4707 sections in @samp{.text} and all @samp{.bss} sections in @samp{.bss}.
4708 The linker will place the @samp{.data} section from all files beginning
4709 with an upper case character in @samp{.DATA}; for all other files, the
4710 linker will place the @samp{.data} section in @samp{.data}.
4711 @smallexample
4712 @group
4713 SECTIONS @{
4714 .text : @{ *(.text) @}
4715 .DATA : @{ [A-Z]*(.data) @}
4716 .data : @{ *(.data) @}
4717 .bss : @{ *(.bss) @}
4718 @}
4719 @end group
4720 @end smallexample
4721
4722 @node Input Section Common
4723 @subsubsection Input Section for Common Symbols
4724 @cindex common symbol placement
4725 @cindex uninitialized data placement
4726 A special notation is needed for common symbols, because in many object
4727 file formats common symbols do not have a particular input section. The
4728 linker treats common symbols as though they are in an input section
4729 named @samp{COMMON}.
4730
4731 You may use file names with the @samp{COMMON} section just as with any
4732 other input sections. You can use this to place common symbols from a
4733 particular input file in one section while common symbols from other
4734 input files are placed in another section.
4735
4736 In most cases, common symbols in input files will be placed in the
4737 @samp{.bss} section in the output file. For example:
4738 @smallexample
4739 .bss @{ *(.bss) *(COMMON) @}
4740 @end smallexample
4741
4742 @cindex scommon section
4743 @cindex small common symbols
4744 Some object file formats have more than one type of common symbol. For
4745 example, the MIPS ELF object file format distinguishes standard common
4746 symbols and small common symbols. In this case, the linker will use a
4747 different special section name for other types of common symbols. In
4748 the case of MIPS ELF, the linker uses @samp{COMMON} for standard common
4749 symbols and @samp{.scommon} for small common symbols. This permits you
4750 to map the different types of common symbols into memory at different
4751 locations.
4752
4753 @cindex [COMMON]
4754 You will sometimes see @samp{[COMMON]} in old linker scripts. This
4755 notation is now considered obsolete. It is equivalent to
4756 @samp{*(COMMON)}.
4757
4758 @node Input Section Keep
4759 @subsubsection Input Section and Garbage Collection
4760 @cindex KEEP
4761 @cindex garbage collection
4762 When link-time garbage collection is in use (@samp{--gc-sections}),
4763 it is often useful to mark sections that should not be eliminated.
4764 This is accomplished by surrounding an input section's wildcard entry
4765 with @code{KEEP()}, as in @code{KEEP(*(.init))} or
4766 @code{KEEP(SORT_BY_NAME(*)(.ctors))}.
4767
4768 @node Input Section Example
4769 @subsubsection Input Section Example
4770 The following example is a complete linker script. It tells the linker
4771 to read all of the sections from file @file{all.o} and place them at the
4772 start of output section @samp{outputa} which starts at location
4773 @samp{0x10000}. All of section @samp{.input1} from file @file{foo.o}
4774 follows immediately, in the same output section. All of section
4775 @samp{.input2} from @file{foo.o} goes into output section
4776 @samp{outputb}, followed by section @samp{.input1} from @file{foo1.o}.
4777 All of the remaining @samp{.input1} and @samp{.input2} sections from any
4778 files are written to output section @samp{outputc}.
4779
4780 @smallexample
4781 @group
4782 SECTIONS @{
4783 outputa 0x10000 :
4784 @{
4785 all.o
4786 foo.o (.input1)
4787 @}
4788 @end group
4789 @group
4790 outputb :
4791 @{
4792 foo.o (.input2)
4793 foo1.o (.input1)
4794 @}
4795 @end group
4796 @group
4797 outputc :
4798 @{
4799 *(.input1)
4800 *(.input2)
4801 @}
4802 @}
4803 @end group
4804 @end smallexample
4805
4806 If an output section's name is the same as the input section's name
4807 and is representable as a C identifier, then the linker will
4808 automatically @pxref{PROVIDE} two symbols: __start_SECNAME and
4809 __stop_SECNAME, where SECNAME is the name of the section. These
4810 indicate the start address and end address of the output section
4811 respectively. Note: most section names are not representable as
4812 C identifiers because they contain a @samp{.} character.
4813
4814 @node Output Section Data
4815 @subsection Output Section Data
4816 @cindex data
4817 @cindex section data
4818 @cindex output section data
4819 @kindex BYTE(@var{expression})
4820 @kindex SHORT(@var{expression})
4821 @kindex LONG(@var{expression})
4822 @kindex QUAD(@var{expression})
4823 @kindex SQUAD(@var{expression})
4824 You can include explicit bytes of data in an output section by using
4825 @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, @code{QUAD}, or @code{SQUAD} as
4826 an output section command. Each keyword is followed by an expression in
4827 parentheses providing the value to store (@pxref{Expressions}). The
4828 value of the expression is stored at the current value of the location
4829 counter.
4830
4831 The @code{BYTE}, @code{SHORT}, @code{LONG}, and @code{QUAD} commands
4832 store one, two, four, and eight bytes (respectively). After storing the
4833 bytes, the location counter is incremented by the number of bytes
4834 stored.
4835
4836 For example, this will store the byte 1 followed by the four byte value
4837 of the symbol @samp{addr}:
4838 @smallexample
4839 BYTE(1)
4840 LONG(addr)
4841 @end smallexample
4842
4843 When using a 64 bit host or target, @code{QUAD} and @code{SQUAD} are the
4844 same; they both store an 8 byte, or 64 bit, value. When both host and
4845 target are 32 bits, an expression is computed as 32 bits. In this case
4846 @code{QUAD} stores a 32 bit value zero extended to 64 bits, and
4847 @code{SQUAD} stores a 32 bit value sign extended to 64 bits.
4848
4849 If the object file format of the output file has an explicit endianness,
4850 which is the normal case, the value will be stored in that endianness.
4851 When the object file format does not have an explicit endianness, as is
4852 true of, for example, S-records, the value will be stored in the
4853 endianness of the first input object file.
4854
4855 Note---these commands only work inside a section description and not
4856 between them, so the following will produce an error from the linker:
4857 @smallexample
4858 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) @}@ LONG(1) .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4859 @end smallexample
4860 whereas this will work:
4861 @smallexample
4862 SECTIONS @{@ .text : @{@ *(.text) ; LONG(1) @}@ .data : @{@ *(.data) @}@ @}@
4863 @end smallexample
4864
4865 @kindex FILL(@var{expression})
4866 @cindex holes, filling
4867 @cindex unspecified memory
4868 You may use the @code{FILL} command to set the fill pattern for the
4869 current section. It is followed by an expression in parentheses. Any
4870 otherwise unspecified regions of memory within the section (for example,
4871 gaps left due to the required alignment of input sections) are filled
4872 with the value of the expression, repeated as
4873 necessary. A @code{FILL} statement covers memory locations after the
4874 point at which it occurs in the section definition; by including more
4875 than one @code{FILL} statement, you can have different fill patterns in
4876 different parts of an output section.
4877
4878 This example shows how to fill unspecified regions of memory with the
4879 value @samp{0x90}:
4880 @smallexample
4881 FILL(0x90909090)
4882 @end smallexample
4883
4884 The @code{FILL} command is similar to the @samp{=@var{fillexp}} output
4885 section attribute, but it only affects the
4886 part of the section following the @code{FILL} command, rather than the
4887 entire section. If both are used, the @code{FILL} command takes
4888 precedence. @xref{Output Section Fill}, for details on the fill
4889 expression.
4890
4891 @node Output Section Keywords
4892 @subsection Output Section Keywords
4893 There are a couple of keywords which can appear as output section
4894 commands.
4895
4896 @table @code
4897 @kindex CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4898 @cindex input filename symbols
4899 @cindex filename symbols
4900 @item CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS
4901 The command tells the linker to create a symbol for each input file.
4902 The name of each symbol will be the name of the corresponding input
4903 file. The section of each symbol will be the output section in which
4904 the @code{CREATE_OBJECT_SYMBOLS} command appears.
4905
4906 This is conventional for the a.out object file format. It is not
4907 normally used for any other object file format.
4908
4909 @kindex CONSTRUCTORS
4910 @cindex C++ constructors, arranging in link
4911 @cindex constructors, arranging in link
4912 @item CONSTRUCTORS
4913 When linking using the a.out object file format, the linker uses an
4914 unusual set construct to support C++ global constructors and
4915 destructors. When linking object file formats which do not support
4916 arbitrary sections, such as ECOFF and XCOFF, the linker will
4917 automatically recognize C++ global constructors and destructors by name.
4918 For these object file formats, the @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command tells the
4919 linker to place constructor information in the output section where the
4920 @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command appears. The @code{CONSTRUCTORS} command is
4921 ignored for other object file formats.
4922
4923 The symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_LIST__}} marks the start of the global
4924 constructors, and the symbol @w{@code{__CTOR_END__}} marks the end.
4925 Similarly, @w{@code{__DTOR_LIST__}} and @w{@code{__DTOR_END__}} mark
4926 the start and end of the global destructors. The
4927 first word in the list is the number of entries, followed by the address
4928 of each constructor or destructor, followed by a zero word. The
4929 compiler must arrange to actually run the code. For these object file
4930 formats @sc{gnu} C++ normally calls constructors from a subroutine
4931 @code{__main}; a call to @code{__main} is automatically inserted into
4932 the startup code for @code{main}. @sc{gnu} C++ normally runs
4933 destructors either by using @code{atexit}, or directly from the function
4934 @code{exit}.
4935
4936 For object file formats such as @code{COFF} or @code{ELF} which support
4937 arbitrary section names, @sc{gnu} C++ will normally arrange to put the
4938 addresses of global constructors and destructors into the @code{.ctors}
4939 and @code{.dtors} sections. Placing the following sequence into your
4940 linker script will build the sort of table which the @sc{gnu} C++
4941 runtime code expects to see.
4942
4943 @smallexample
4944 __CTOR_LIST__ = .;
4945 LONG((__CTOR_END__ - __CTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4946 *(.ctors)
4947 LONG(0)
4948 __CTOR_END__ = .;
4949 __DTOR_LIST__ = .;
4950 LONG((__DTOR_END__ - __DTOR_LIST__) / 4 - 2)
4951 *(.dtors)
4952 LONG(0)
4953 __DTOR_END__ = .;
4954 @end smallexample
4955
4956 If you are using the @sc{gnu} C++ support for initialization priority,
4957 which provides some control over the order in which global constructors
4958 are run, you must sort the constructors at link time to ensure that they
4959 are executed in the correct order. When using the @code{CONSTRUCTORS}
4960 command, use @samp{SORT_BY_NAME(CONSTRUCTORS)} instead. When using the
4961 @code{.ctors} and @code{.dtors} sections, use @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.ctors))} and
4962 @samp{*(SORT_BY_NAME(.dtors))} instead of just @samp{*(.ctors)} and
4963 @samp{*(.dtors)}.
4964
4965 Normally the compiler and linker will handle these issues automatically,
4966 and you will not need to concern yourself with them. However, you may
4967 need to consider this if you are using C++ and writing your own linker
4968 scripts.
4969
4970 @end table
4971
4972 @node Output Section Discarding
4973 @subsection Output Section Discarding
4974 @cindex discarding sections
4975 @cindex sections, discarding
4976 @cindex removing sections
4977 The linker will not normally create output sections with no contents.
4978 This is for convenience when referring to input sections that may or
4979 may not be present in any of the input files. For example:
4980 @smallexample
4981 .foo : @{ *(.foo) @}
4982 @end smallexample
4983 @noindent
4984 will only create a @samp{.foo} section in the output file if there is a
4985 @samp{.foo} section in at least one input file, and if the input
4986 sections are not all empty. Other link script directives that allocate
4987 space in an output section will also create the output section. So
4988 too will assignments to dot even if the assignment does not create
4989 space, except for @samp{. = 0}, @samp{. = . + 0}, @samp{. = sym},
4990 @samp{. = . + sym} and @samp{. = ALIGN (. != 0, expr, 1)} when
4991 @samp{sym} is an absolute symbol of value 0 defined in the script.
4992 This allows you to force output of an empty section with @samp{. = .}.
4993
4994 The linker will ignore address assignments (@pxref{Output Section Address})
4995 on discarded output sections, except when the linker script defines
4996 symbols in the output section. In that case the linker will obey
4997 the address assignments, possibly advancing dot even though the
4998 section is discarded.
4999
5000 @cindex /DISCARD/
5001 The special output section name @samp{/DISCARD/} may be used to discard
5002 input sections. Any input sections which are assigned to an output
5003 section named @samp{/DISCARD/} are not included in the output file.
5004
5005 Note, sections that match the @samp{/DISCARD/} output section will be
5006 discarded even if they are in an ELF section group which has other
5007 members which are not being discarded. This is deliberate.
5008 Discarding takes precedence over grouping.
5009
5010 @node Output Section Attributes
5011 @subsection Output Section Attributes
5012 @cindex output section attributes
5013 We showed above that the full description of an output section looked
5014 like this:
5015
5016 @smallexample
5017 @group
5018 @var{section} [@var{address}] [(@var{type})] :
5019 [AT(@var{lma})]
5020 [ALIGN(@var{section_align}) | ALIGN_WITH_INPUT]
5021 [SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})]
5022 [@var{constraint}]
5023 @{
5024 @var{output-section-command}
5025 @var{output-section-command}
5026 @dots{}
5027 @} [>@var{region}] [AT>@var{lma_region}] [:@var{phdr} :@var{phdr} @dots{}] [=@var{fillexp}]
5028 @end group
5029 @end smallexample
5030
5031 We've already described @var{section}, @var{address}, and
5032 @var{output-section-command}. In this section we will describe the
5033 remaining section attributes.
5034
5035 @menu
5036 * Output Section Type:: Output section type
5037 * Output Section LMA:: Output section LMA
5038 * Forced Output Alignment:: Forced Output Alignment
5039 * Forced Input Alignment:: Forced Input Alignment
5040 * Output Section Constraint:: Output section constraint
5041 * Output Section Region:: Output section region
5042 * Output Section Phdr:: Output section phdr
5043 * Output Section Fill:: Output section fill
5044 @end menu
5045
5046 @node Output Section Type
5047 @subsubsection Output Section Type
5048 Each output section may have a type. The type is a keyword in
5049 parentheses. The following types are defined:
5050
5051 @table @code
5052 @item NOLOAD
5053 The section should be marked as not loadable, so that it will not be
5054 loaded into memory when the program is run.
5055 @item DSECT
5056 @itemx COPY
5057 @itemx INFO
5058 @itemx OVERLAY
5059 These type names are supported for backward compatibility, and are
5060 rarely used. They all have the same effect: the section should be
5061 marked as not allocatable, so that no memory is allocated for the
5062 section when the program is run.
5063 @end table
5064
5065 @kindex NOLOAD
5066 @cindex prevent unnecessary loading
5067 @cindex loading, preventing
5068 The linker normally sets the attributes of an output section based on
5069 the input sections which map into it. You can override this by using
5070 the section type. For example, in the script sample below, the
5071 @samp{ROM} section is addressed at memory location @samp{0} and does not
5072 need to be loaded when the program is run.
5073 @smallexample
5074 @group
5075 SECTIONS @{
5076 ROM 0 (NOLOAD) : @{ @dots{} @}
5077 @dots{}
5078 @}
5079 @end group
5080 @end smallexample
5081
5082 @node Output Section LMA
5083 @subsubsection Output Section LMA
5084 @kindex AT>@var{lma_region}
5085 @kindex AT(@var{lma})
5086 @cindex load address
5087 @cindex section load address
5088 Every section has a virtual address (VMA) and a load address (LMA); see
5089 @ref{Basic Script Concepts}. The virtual address is specified by the
5090 @pxref{Output Section Address} described earlier. The load address is
5091 specified by the @code{AT} or @code{AT>} keywords. Specifying a load
5092 address is optional.
5093
5094 The @code{AT} keyword takes an expression as an argument. This
5095 specifies the exact load address of the section. The @code{AT>} keyword
5096 takes the name of a memory region as an argument. @xref{MEMORY}. The
5097 load address of the section is set to the next free address in the
5098 region, aligned to the section's alignment requirements.
5099
5100 If neither @code{AT} nor @code{AT>} is specified for an allocatable
5101 section, the linker will use the following heuristic to determine the
5102 load address:
5103
5104 @itemize @bullet
5105 @item
5106 If the section has a specific VMA address, then this is used as
5107 the LMA address as well.
5108
5109 @item
5110 If the section is not allocatable then its LMA is set to its VMA.
5111
5112 @item
5113 Otherwise if a memory region can be found that is compatible
5114 with the current section, and this region contains at least one
5115 section, then the LMA is set so the difference between the
5116 VMA and LMA is the same as the difference between the VMA and LMA of
5117 the last section in the located region.
5118
5119 @item
5120 If no memory regions have been declared then a default region
5121 that covers the entire address space is used in the previous step.
5122
5123 @item
5124 If no suitable region could be found, or there was no previous
5125 section then the LMA is set equal to the VMA.
5126 @end itemize
5127
5128 @cindex ROM initialized data
5129 @cindex initialized data in ROM
5130 This feature is designed to make it easy to build a ROM image. For
5131 example, the following linker script creates three output sections: one
5132 called @samp{.text}, which starts at @code{0x1000}, one called
5133 @samp{.mdata}, which is loaded at the end of the @samp{.text} section
5134 even though its VMA is @code{0x2000}, and one called @samp{.bss} to hold
5135 uninitialized data at address @code{0x3000}. The symbol @code{_data} is
5136 defined with the value @code{0x2000}, which shows that the location
5137 counter holds the VMA value, not the LMA value.
5138
5139 @smallexample
5140 @group
5141 SECTIONS
5142 @{
5143 .text 0x1000 : @{ *(.text) _etext = . ; @}
5144 .mdata 0x2000 :
5145 AT ( ADDR (.text) + SIZEOF (.text) )
5146 @{ _data = . ; *(.data); _edata = . ; @}
5147 .bss 0x3000 :
5148 @{ _bstart = . ; *(.bss) *(COMMON) ; _bend = . ;@}
5149 @}
5150 @end group
5151 @end smallexample
5152
5153 The run-time initialization code for use with a program generated with
5154 this linker script would include something like the following, to copy
5155 the initialized data from the ROM image to its runtime address. Notice
5156 how this code takes advantage of the symbols defined by the linker
5157 script.
5158
5159 @smallexample
5160 @group
5161 extern char _etext, _data, _edata, _bstart, _bend;
5162 char *src = &_etext;
5163 char *dst = &_data;
5164
5165 /* ROM has data at end of text; copy it. */
5166 while (dst < &_edata)
5167 *dst++ = *src++;
5168
5169 /* Zero bss. */
5170 for (dst = &_bstart; dst< &_bend; dst++)
5171 *dst = 0;
5172 @end group
5173 @end smallexample
5174
5175 @node Forced Output Alignment
5176 @subsubsection Forced Output Alignment
5177 @kindex ALIGN(@var{section_align})
5178 @cindex forcing output section alignment
5179 @cindex output section alignment
5180 You can increase an output section's alignment by using ALIGN. As an
5181 alternative you can enforce that the difference between the VMA and LMA remains
5182 intact throughout this output section with the ALIGN_WITH_INPUT attribute.
5183
5184 @node Forced Input Alignment
5185 @subsubsection Forced Input Alignment
5186 @kindex SUBALIGN(@var{subsection_align})
5187 @cindex forcing input section alignment
5188 @cindex input section alignment
5189 You can force input section alignment within an output section by using
5190 SUBALIGN. The value specified overrides any alignment given by input
5191 sections, whether larger or smaller.
5192
5193 @node Output Section Constraint
5194 @subsubsection Output Section Constraint
5195 @kindex ONLY_IF_RO
5196 @kindex ONLY_IF_RW
5197 @cindex constraints on output sections
5198 You can specify that an output section should only be created if all
5199 of its input sections are read-only or all of its input sections are
5200 read-write by using the keyword @code{ONLY_IF_RO} and
5201 @code{ONLY_IF_RW} respectively.
5202
5203 @node Output Section Region
5204 @subsubsection Output Section Region
5205 @kindex >@var{region}
5206 @cindex section, assigning to memory region
5207 @cindex memory regions and sections
5208 You can assign a section to a previously defined region of memory by
5209 using @samp{>@var{region}}. @xref{MEMORY}.
5210
5211 Here is a simple example:
5212 @smallexample
5213 @group
5214 MEMORY @{ rom : ORIGIN = 0x1000, LENGTH = 0x1000 @}
5215 SECTIONS @{ ROM : @{ *(.text) @} >rom @}
5216 @end group
5217 @end smallexample
5218
5219 @node Output Section Phdr
5220 @subsubsection Output Section Phdr
5221 @kindex :@var{phdr}
5222 @cindex section, assigning to program header
5223 @cindex program headers and sections
5224 You can assign a section to a previously defined program segment by
5225 using @samp{:@var{phdr}}. @xref{PHDRS}. If a section is assigned to
5226 one or more segments, then all subsequent allocated sections will be
5227 assigned to those segments as well, unless they use an explicitly
5228 @code{:@var{phdr}} modifier. You can use @code{:NONE} to tell the
5229 linker to not put the section in any segment at all.
5230
5231 Here is a simple example:
5232 @smallexample
5233 @group
5234 PHDRS @{ text PT_LOAD ; @}
5235 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text @}
5236 @end group
5237 @end smallexample
5238
5239 @node Output Section Fill
5240 @subsubsection Output Section Fill
5241 @kindex =@var{fillexp}
5242 @cindex section fill pattern
5243 @cindex fill pattern, entire section
5244 You can set the fill pattern for an entire section by using
5245 @samp{=@var{fillexp}}. @var{fillexp} is an expression
5246 (@pxref{Expressions}). Any otherwise unspecified regions of memory
5247 within the output section (for example, gaps left due to the required
5248 alignment of input sections) will be filled with the value, repeated as
5249 necessary. If the fill expression is a simple hex number, ie. a string
5250 of hex digit starting with @samp{0x} and without a trailing @samp{k} or @samp{M}, then
5251 an arbitrarily long sequence of hex digits can be used to specify the
5252 fill pattern; Leading zeros become part of the pattern too. For all
5253 other cases, including extra parentheses or a unary @code{+}, the fill
5254 pattern is the four least significant bytes of the value of the
5255 expression. In all cases, the number is big-endian.
5256
5257 You can also change the fill value with a @code{FILL} command in the
5258 output section commands; (@pxref{Output Section Data}).
5259
5260 Here is a simple example:
5261 @smallexample
5262 @group
5263 SECTIONS @{ .text : @{ *(.text) @} =0x90909090 @}
5264 @end group
5265 @end smallexample
5266
5267 @node Overlay Description
5268 @subsection Overlay Description
5269 @kindex OVERLAY
5270 @cindex overlays
5271 An overlay description provides an easy way to describe sections which
5272 are to be loaded as part of a single memory image but are to be run at
5273 the same memory address. At run time, some sort of overlay manager will
5274 copy the overlaid sections in and out of the runtime memory address as
5275 required, perhaps by simply manipulating addressing bits. This approach
5276 can be useful, for example, when a certain region of memory is faster
5277 than another.
5278
5279 Overlays are described using the @code{OVERLAY} command. The
5280 @code{OVERLAY} command is used within a @code{SECTIONS} command, like an
5281 output section description. The full syntax of the @code{OVERLAY}
5282 command is as follows:
5283 @smallexample
5284 @group
5285 OVERLAY [@var{start}] : [NOCROSSREFS] [AT ( @var{ldaddr} )]
5286 @{
5287 @var{secname1}
5288 @{
5289 @var{output-section-command}
5290 @var{output-section-command}
5291 @dots{}
5292 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5293 @var{secname2}
5294 @{
5295 @var{output-section-command}
5296 @var{output-section-command}
5297 @dots{}
5298 @} [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}]
5299 @dots{}
5300 @} [>@var{region}] [:@var{phdr}@dots{}] [=@var{fill}] [,]
5301 @end group
5302 @end smallexample
5303
5304 Everything is optional except @code{OVERLAY} (a keyword), and each
5305 section must have a name (@var{secname1} and @var{secname2} above). The
5306 section definitions within the @code{OVERLAY} construct are identical to
5307 those within the general @code{SECTIONS} construct (@pxref{SECTIONS}),
5308 except that no addresses and no memory regions may be defined for
5309 sections within an @code{OVERLAY}.
5310
5311 The comma at the end may be required if a @var{fill} is used and
5312 the next @var{sections-command} looks like a continuation of the expression.
5313
5314 The sections are all defined with the same starting address. The load
5315 addresses of the sections are arranged such that they are consecutive in
5316 memory starting at the load address used for the @code{OVERLAY} as a
5317 whole (as with normal section definitions, the load address is optional,
5318 and defaults to the start address; the start address is also optional,
5319 and defaults to the current value of the location counter).
5320
5321 If the @code{NOCROSSREFS} keyword is used, and there are any
5322 references among the sections, the linker will report an error. Since
5323 the sections all run at the same address, it normally does not make
5324 sense for one section to refer directly to another.
5325 @xref{Miscellaneous Commands, NOCROSSREFS}.
5326
5327 For each section within the @code{OVERLAY}, the linker automatically
5328 provides two symbols. The symbol @code{__load_start_@var{secname}} is
5329 defined as the starting load address of the section. The symbol
5330 @code{__load_stop_@var{secname}} is defined as the final load address of
5331 the section. Any characters within @var{secname} which are not legal
5332 within C identifiers are removed. C (or assembler) code may use these
5333 symbols to move the overlaid sections around as necessary.
5334
5335 At the end of the overlay, the value of the location counter is set to
5336 the start address of the overlay plus the size of the largest section.
5337
5338 Here is an example. Remember that this would appear inside a
5339 @code{SECTIONS} construct.
5340 @smallexample
5341 @group
5342 OVERLAY 0x1000 : AT (0x4000)
5343 @{
5344 .text0 @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5345 .text1 @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5346 @}
5347 @end group
5348 @end smallexample
5349 @noindent
5350 This will define both @samp{.text0} and @samp{.text1} to start at
5351 address 0x1000. @samp{.text0} will be loaded at address 0x4000, and
5352 @samp{.text1} will be loaded immediately after @samp{.text0}. The
5353 following symbols will be defined if referenced: @code{__load_start_text0},
5354 @code{__load_stop_text0}, @code{__load_start_text1},
5355 @code{__load_stop_text1}.
5356
5357 C code to copy overlay @code{.text1} into the overlay area might look
5358 like the following.
5359
5360 @smallexample
5361 @group
5362 extern char __load_start_text1, __load_stop_text1;
5363 memcpy ((char *) 0x1000, &__load_start_text1,
5364 &__load_stop_text1 - &__load_start_text1);
5365 @end group
5366 @end smallexample
5367
5368 Note that the @code{OVERLAY} command is just syntactic sugar, since
5369 everything it does can be done using the more basic commands. The above
5370 example could have been written identically as follows.
5371
5372 @smallexample
5373 @group
5374 .text0 0x1000 : AT (0x4000) @{ o1/*.o(.text) @}
5375 PROVIDE (__load_start_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0));
5376 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text0 = LOADADDR (.text0) + SIZEOF (.text0));
5377 .text1 0x1000 : AT (0x4000 + SIZEOF (.text0)) @{ o2/*.o(.text) @}
5378 PROVIDE (__load_start_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1));
5379 PROVIDE (__load_stop_text1 = LOADADDR (.text1) + SIZEOF (.text1));
5380 . = 0x1000 + MAX (SIZEOF (.text0), SIZEOF (.text1));
5381 @end group
5382 @end smallexample
5383
5384 @node MEMORY
5385 @section MEMORY Command
5386 @kindex MEMORY
5387 @cindex memory regions
5388 @cindex regions of memory
5389 @cindex allocating memory
5390 @cindex discontinuous memory
5391 The linker's default configuration permits allocation of all available
5392 memory. You can override this by using the @code{MEMORY} command.
5393
5394 The @code{MEMORY} command describes the location and size of blocks of
5395 memory in the target. You can use it to describe which memory regions
5396 may be used by the linker, and which memory regions it must avoid. You
5397 can then assign sections to particular memory regions. The linker will
5398 set section addresses based on the memory regions, and will warn about
5399 regions that become too full. The linker will not shuffle sections
5400 around to fit into the available regions.
5401
5402 A linker script may contain many uses of the @code{MEMORY} command,
5403 however, all memory blocks defined are treated as if they were
5404 specified inside a single @code{MEMORY} command. The syntax for
5405 @code{MEMORY} is:
5406 @smallexample
5407 @group
5408 MEMORY
5409 @{
5410 @var{name} [(@var{attr})] : ORIGIN = @var{origin}, LENGTH = @var{len}
5411 @dots{}
5412 @}
5413 @end group
5414 @end smallexample
5415
5416 The @var{name} is a name used in the linker script to refer to the
5417 region. The region name has no meaning outside of the linker script.
5418 Region names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5419 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each memory region
5420 must have a distinct name within the @code{MEMORY} command. However you can
5421 add later alias names to existing memory regions with the @ref{REGION_ALIAS}
5422 command.
5423
5424 @cindex memory region attributes
5425 The @var{attr} string is an optional list of attributes that specify
5426 whether to use a particular memory region for an input section which is
5427 not explicitly mapped in the linker script. As described in
5428 @ref{SECTIONS}, if you do not specify an output section for some input
5429 section, the linker will create an output section with the same name as
5430 the input section. If you define region attributes, the linker will use
5431 them to select the memory region for the output section that it creates.
5432
5433 The @var{attr} string must consist only of the following characters:
5434 @table @samp
5435 @item R
5436 Read-only section
5437 @item W
5438 Read/write section
5439 @item X
5440 Executable section
5441 @item A
5442 Allocatable section
5443 @item I
5444 Initialized section
5445 @item L
5446 Same as @samp{I}
5447 @item !
5448 Invert the sense of any of the attributes that follow
5449 @end table
5450
5451 If an unmapped section matches any of the listed attributes other than
5452 @samp{!}, it will be placed in the memory region. The @samp{!}
5453 attribute reverses the test for the characters that follow, so that an
5454 unmapped section will be placed in the memory region only if it does
5455 not match any of the attributes listed afterwards. Thus an attribute
5456 string of @samp{RW!X} will match any unmapped section that has either
5457 or both of the @samp{R} and @samp{W} attributes, but only as long as
5458 the section does not also have the @samp{X} attribute.
5459
5460 @kindex ORIGIN =
5461 @kindex o =
5462 @kindex org =
5463 The @var{origin} is an numerical expression for the start address of
5464 the memory region. The expression must evaluate to a constant and it
5465 cannot involve any symbols. The keyword @code{ORIGIN} may be
5466 abbreviated to @code{org} or @code{o} (but not, for example,
5467 @code{ORG}).
5468
5469 @kindex LENGTH =
5470 @kindex len =
5471 @kindex l =
5472 The @var{len} is an expression for the size in bytes of the memory
5473 region. As with the @var{origin} expression, the expression must
5474 be numerical only and must evaluate to a constant. The keyword
5475 @code{LENGTH} may be abbreviated to @code{len} or @code{l}.
5476
5477 In the following example, we specify that there are two memory regions
5478 available for allocation: one starting at @samp{0} for 256 kilobytes,
5479 and the other starting at @samp{0x40000000} for four megabytes. The
5480 linker will place into the @samp{rom} memory region every section which
5481 is not explicitly mapped into a memory region, and is either read-only
5482 or executable. The linker will place other sections which are not
5483 explicitly mapped into a memory region into the @samp{ram} memory
5484 region.
5485
5486 @smallexample
5487 @group
5488 MEMORY
5489 @{
5490 rom (rx) : ORIGIN = 0, LENGTH = 256K
5491 ram (!rx) : org = 0x40000000, l = 4M
5492 @}
5493 @end group
5494 @end smallexample
5495
5496 Once you define a memory region, you can direct the linker to place
5497 specific output sections into that memory region by using the
5498 @samp{>@var{region}} output section attribute. For example, if you have
5499 a memory region named @samp{mem}, you would use @samp{>mem} in the
5500 output section definition. @xref{Output Section Region}. If no address
5501 was specified for the output section, the linker will set the address to
5502 the next available address within the memory region. If the combined
5503 output sections directed to a memory region are too large for the
5504 region, the linker will issue an error message.
5505
5506 It is possible to access the origin and length of a memory in an
5507 expression via the @code{ORIGIN(@var{memory})} and
5508 @code{LENGTH(@var{memory})} functions:
5509
5510 @smallexample
5511 @group
5512 _fstack = ORIGIN(ram) + LENGTH(ram) - 4;
5513 @end group
5514 @end smallexample
5515
5516 @node PHDRS
5517 @section PHDRS Command
5518 @kindex PHDRS
5519 @cindex program headers
5520 @cindex ELF program headers
5521 @cindex program segments
5522 @cindex segments, ELF
5523 The ELF object file format uses @dfn{program headers}, also knows as
5524 @dfn{segments}. The program headers describe how the program should be
5525 loaded into memory. You can print them out by using the @code{objdump}
5526 program with the @samp{-p} option.
5527
5528 When you run an ELF program on a native ELF system, the system loader
5529 reads the program headers in order to figure out how to load the
5530 program. This will only work if the program headers are set correctly.
5531 This manual does not describe the details of how the system loader
5532 interprets program headers; for more information, see the ELF ABI.
5533
5534 The linker will create reasonable program headers by default. However,
5535 in some cases, you may need to specify the program headers more
5536 precisely. You may use the @code{PHDRS} command for this purpose. When
5537 the linker sees the @code{PHDRS} command in the linker script, it will
5538 not create any program headers other than the ones specified.
5539
5540 The linker only pays attention to the @code{PHDRS} command when
5541 generating an ELF output file. In other cases, the linker will simply
5542 ignore @code{PHDRS}.
5543
5544 This is the syntax of the @code{PHDRS} command. The words @code{PHDRS},
5545 @code{FILEHDR}, @code{AT}, and @code{FLAGS} are keywords.
5546
5547 @smallexample
5548 @group
5549 PHDRS
5550 @{
5551 @var{name} @var{type} [ FILEHDR ] [ PHDRS ] [ AT ( @var{address} ) ]
5552 [ FLAGS ( @var{flags} ) ] ;
5553 @}
5554 @end group
5555 @end smallexample
5556
5557 The @var{name} is used only for reference in the @code{SECTIONS} command
5558 of the linker script. It is not put into the output file. Program
5559 header names are stored in a separate name space, and will not conflict
5560 with symbol names, file names, or section names. Each program header
5561 must have a distinct name. The headers are processed in order and it
5562 is usual for them to map to sections in ascending load address order.
5563
5564 Certain program header types describe segments of memory which the
5565 system loader will load from the file. In the linker script, you
5566 specify the contents of these segments by placing allocatable output
5567 sections in the segments. You use the @samp{:@var{phdr}} output section
5568 attribute to place a section in a particular segment. @xref{Output
5569 Section Phdr}.
5570
5571 It is normal to put certain sections in more than one segment. This
5572 merely implies that one segment of memory contains another. You may
5573 repeat @samp{:@var{phdr}}, using it once for each segment which should
5574 contain the section.
5575
5576 If you place a section in one or more segments using @samp{:@var{phdr}},
5577 then the linker will place all subsequent allocatable sections which do
5578 not specify @samp{:@var{phdr}} in the same segments. This is for
5579 convenience, since generally a whole set of contiguous sections will be
5580 placed in a single segment. You can use @code{:NONE} to override the
5581 default segment and tell the linker to not put the section in any
5582 segment at all.
5583
5584 @kindex FILEHDR
5585 @kindex PHDRS
5586 You may use the @code{FILEHDR} and @code{PHDRS} keywords after
5587 the program header type to further describe the contents of the segment.
5588 The @code{FILEHDR} keyword means that the segment should include the ELF
5589 file header. The @code{PHDRS} keyword means that the segment should
5590 include the ELF program headers themselves. If applied to a loadable
5591 segment (@code{PT_LOAD}), all prior loadable segments must have one of
5592 these keywords.
5593
5594 The @var{type} may be one of the following. The numbers indicate the
5595 value of the keyword.
5596
5597 @table @asis
5598 @item @code{PT_NULL} (0)
5599 Indicates an unused program header.
5600
5601 @item @code{PT_LOAD} (1)
5602 Indicates that this program header describes a segment to be loaded from
5603 the file.
5604
5605 @item @code{PT_DYNAMIC} (2)
5606 Indicates a segment where dynamic linking information can be found.
5607
5608 @item @code{PT_INTERP} (3)
5609 Indicates a segment where the name of the program interpreter may be
5610 found.
5611
5612 @item @code{PT_NOTE} (4)
5613 Indicates a segment holding note information.
5614
5615 @item @code{PT_SHLIB} (5)
5616 A reserved program header type, defined but not specified by the ELF
5617 ABI.
5618
5619 @item @code{PT_PHDR} (6)
5620 Indicates a segment where the program headers may be found.
5621
5622 @item @code{PT_TLS} (7)
5623 Indicates a segment containing thread local storage.
5624
5625 @item @var{expression}
5626 An expression giving the numeric type of the program header. This may
5627 be used for types not defined above.
5628 @end table
5629
5630 You can specify that a segment should be loaded at a particular address
5631 in memory by using an @code{AT} expression. This is identical to the
5632 @code{AT} command used as an output section attribute (@pxref{Output
5633 Section LMA}). The @code{AT} command for a program header overrides the
5634 output section attribute.
5635
5636 The linker will normally set the segment flags based on the sections
5637 which comprise the segment. You may use the @code{FLAGS} keyword to
5638 explicitly specify the segment flags. The value of @var{flags} must be
5639 an integer. It is used to set the @code{p_flags} field of the program
5640 header.
5641
5642 Here is an example of @code{PHDRS}. This shows a typical set of program
5643 headers used on a native ELF system.
5644
5645 @example
5646 @group
5647 PHDRS
5648 @{
5649 headers PT_PHDR PHDRS ;
5650 interp PT_INTERP ;
5651 text PT_LOAD FILEHDR PHDRS ;
5652 data PT_LOAD ;
5653 dynamic PT_DYNAMIC ;
5654 @}
5655
5656 SECTIONS
5657 @{
5658 . = SIZEOF_HEADERS;
5659 .interp : @{ *(.interp) @} :text :interp
5660 .text : @{ *(.text) @} :text
5661 .rodata : @{ *(.rodata) @} /* defaults to :text */
5662 @dots{}
5663 . = . + 0x1000; /* move to a new page in memory */
5664 .data : @{ *(.data) @} :data
5665 .dynamic : @{ *(.dynamic) @} :data :dynamic
5666 @dots{}
5667 @}
5668 @end group
5669 @end example
5670
5671 @node VERSION
5672 @section VERSION Command
5673 @kindex VERSION @{script text@}
5674 @cindex symbol versions
5675 @cindex version script
5676 @cindex versions of symbols
5677 The linker supports symbol versions when using ELF. Symbol versions are
5678 only useful when using shared libraries. The dynamic linker can use
5679 symbol versions to select a specific version of a function when it runs
5680 a program that may have been linked against an earlier version of the
5681 shared library.
5682
5683 You can include a version script directly in the main linker script, or
5684 you can supply the version script as an implicit linker script. You can
5685 also use the @samp{--version-script} linker option.
5686
5687 The syntax of the @code{VERSION} command is simply
5688 @smallexample
5689 VERSION @{ version-script-commands @}
5690 @end smallexample
5691
5692 The format of the version script commands is identical to that used by
5693 Sun's linker in Solaris 2.5. The version script defines a tree of
5694 version nodes. You specify the node names and interdependencies in the
5695 version script. You can specify which symbols are bound to which
5696 version nodes, and you can reduce a specified set of symbols to local
5697 scope so that they are not globally visible outside of the shared
5698 library.
5699
5700 The easiest way to demonstrate the version script language is with a few
5701 examples.
5702
5703 @smallexample
5704 VERS_1.1 @{
5705 global:
5706 foo1;
5707 local:
5708 old*;
5709 original*;
5710 new*;
5711 @};
5712
5713 VERS_1.2 @{
5714 foo2;
5715 @} VERS_1.1;
5716
5717 VERS_2.0 @{
5718 bar1; bar2;
5719 extern "C++" @{
5720 ns::*;
5721 "f(int, double)";
5722 @};
5723 @} VERS_1.2;
5724 @end smallexample
5725
5726 This example version script defines three version nodes. The first
5727 version node defined is @samp{VERS_1.1}; it has no other dependencies.
5728 The script binds the symbol @samp{foo1} to @samp{VERS_1.1}. It reduces
5729 a number of symbols to local scope so that they are not visible outside
5730 of the shared library; this is done using wildcard patterns, so that any
5731 symbol whose name begins with @samp{old}, @samp{original}, or @samp{new}
5732 is matched. The wildcard patterns available are the same as those used
5733 in the shell when matching filenames (also known as ``globbing'').
5734 However, if you specify the symbol name inside double quotes, then the
5735 name is treated as literal, rather than as a glob pattern.
5736
5737 Next, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_1.2}. This node
5738 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.1}. The script binds the symbol @samp{foo2}
5739 to the version node @samp{VERS_1.2}.
5740
5741 Finally, the version script defines node @samp{VERS_2.0}. This node
5742 depends upon @samp{VERS_1.2}. The scripts binds the symbols @samp{bar1}
5743 and @samp{bar2} are bound to the version node @samp{VERS_2.0}.
5744
5745 When the linker finds a symbol defined in a library which is not
5746 specifically bound to a version node, it will effectively bind it to an
5747 unspecified base version of the library. You can bind all otherwise
5748 unspecified symbols to a given version node by using @samp{global: *;}
5749 somewhere in the version script. Note that it's slightly crazy to use
5750 wildcards in a global spec except on the last version node. Global
5751 wildcards elsewhere run the risk of accidentally adding symbols to the
5752 set exported for an old version. That's wrong since older versions
5753 ought to have a fixed set of symbols.
5754
5755 The names of the version nodes have no specific meaning other than what
5756 they might suggest to the person reading them. The @samp{2.0} version
5757 could just as well have appeared in between @samp{1.1} and @samp{1.2}.
5758 However, this would be a confusing way to write a version script.
5759
5760 Node name can be omitted, provided it is the only version node
5761 in the version script. Such version script doesn't assign any versions to
5762 symbols, only selects which symbols will be globally visible out and which
5763 won't.
5764
5765 @smallexample
5766 @{ global: foo; bar; local: *; @};
5767 @end smallexample
5768
5769 When you link an application against a shared library that has versioned
5770 symbols, the application itself knows which version of each symbol it
5771 requires, and it also knows which version nodes it needs from each
5772 shared library it is linked against. Thus at runtime, the dynamic
5773 loader can make a quick check to make sure that the libraries you have
5774 linked against do in fact supply all of the version nodes that the
5775 application will need to resolve all of the dynamic symbols. In this
5776 way it is possible for the dynamic linker to know with certainty that
5777 all external symbols that it needs will be resolvable without having to
5778 search for each symbol reference.
5779
5780 The symbol versioning is in effect a much more sophisticated way of
5781 doing minor version checking that SunOS does. The fundamental problem
5782 that is being addressed here is that typically references to external
5783 functions are bound on an as-needed basis, and are not all bound when
5784 the application starts up. If a shared library is out of date, a
5785 required interface may be missing; when the application tries to use
5786 that interface, it may suddenly and unexpectedly fail. With symbol
5787 versioning, the user will get a warning when they start their program if
5788 the libraries being used with the application are too old.
5789
5790 There are several GNU extensions to Sun's versioning approach. The
5791 first of these is the ability to bind a symbol to a version node in the
5792 source file where the symbol is defined instead of in the versioning
5793 script. This was done mainly to reduce the burden on the library
5794 maintainer. You can do this by putting something like:
5795 @smallexample
5796 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5797 @end smallexample
5798 @noindent
5799 in the C source file. This renames the function @samp{original_foo} to
5800 be an alias for @samp{foo} bound to the version node @samp{VERS_1.1}.
5801 The @samp{local:} directive can be used to prevent the symbol
5802 @samp{original_foo} from being exported. A @samp{.symver} directive
5803 takes precedence over a version script.
5804
5805 The second GNU extension is to allow multiple versions of the same
5806 function to appear in a given shared library. In this way you can make
5807 an incompatible change to an interface without increasing the major
5808 version number of the shared library, while still allowing applications
5809 linked against the old interface to continue to function.
5810
5811 To do this, you must use multiple @samp{.symver} directives in the
5812 source file. Here is an example:
5813
5814 @smallexample
5815 __asm__(".symver original_foo,foo@@");
5816 __asm__(".symver old_foo,foo@@VERS_1.1");
5817 __asm__(".symver old_foo1,foo@@VERS_1.2");
5818 __asm__(".symver new_foo,foo@@@@VERS_2.0");
5819 @end smallexample
5820
5821 In this example, @samp{foo@@} represents the symbol @samp{foo} bound to the
5822 unspecified base version of the symbol. The source file that contains this
5823 example would define 4 C functions: @samp{original_foo}, @samp{old_foo},
5824 @samp{old_foo1}, and @samp{new_foo}.
5825
5826 When you have multiple definitions of a given symbol, there needs to be
5827 some way to specify a default version to which external references to
5828 this symbol will be bound. You can do this with the
5829 @samp{foo@@@@VERS_2.0} type of @samp{.symver} directive. You can only
5830 declare one version of a symbol as the default in this manner; otherwise
5831 you would effectively have multiple definitions of the same symbol.
5832
5833 If you wish to bind a reference to a specific version of the symbol
5834 within the shared library, you can use the aliases of convenience
5835 (i.e., @samp{old_foo}), or you can use the @samp{.symver} directive to
5836 specifically bind to an external version of the function in question.
5837
5838 You can also specify the language in the version script:
5839
5840 @smallexample
5841 VERSION extern "lang" @{ version-script-commands @}
5842 @end smallexample
5843
5844 The supported @samp{lang}s are @samp{C}, @samp{C++}, and @samp{Java}.
5845 The linker will iterate over the list of symbols at the link time and
5846 demangle them according to @samp{lang} before matching them to the
5847 patterns specified in @samp{version-script-commands}. The default
5848 @samp{lang} is @samp{C}.
5849
5850 Demangled names may contains spaces and other special characters. As
5851 described above, you can use a glob pattern to match demangled names,
5852 or you can use a double-quoted string to match the string exactly. In
5853 the latter case, be aware that minor differences (such as differing
5854 whitespace) between the version script and the demangler output will
5855 cause a mismatch. As the exact string generated by the demangler
5856 might change in the future, even if the mangled name does not, you
5857 should check that all of your version directives are behaving as you
5858 expect when you upgrade.
5859
5860 @node Expressions
5861 @section Expressions in Linker Scripts
5862 @cindex expressions
5863 @cindex arithmetic
5864 The syntax for expressions in the linker script language is identical to
5865 that of C expressions. All expressions are evaluated as integers. All
5866 expressions are evaluated in the same size, which is 32 bits if both the
5867 host and target are 32 bits, and is otherwise 64 bits.
5868
5869 You can use and set symbol values in expressions.
5870
5871 The linker defines several special purpose builtin functions for use in
5872 expressions.
5873
5874 @menu
5875 * Constants:: Constants
5876 * Symbolic Constants:: Symbolic constants
5877 * Symbols:: Symbol Names
5878 * Orphan Sections:: Orphan Sections
5879 * Location Counter:: The Location Counter
5880 * Operators:: Operators
5881 * Evaluation:: Evaluation
5882 * Expression Section:: The Section of an Expression
5883 * Builtin Functions:: Builtin Functions
5884 @end menu
5885
5886 @node Constants
5887 @subsection Constants
5888 @cindex integer notation
5889 @cindex constants in linker scripts
5890 All constants are integers.
5891
5892 As in C, the linker considers an integer beginning with @samp{0} to be
5893 octal, and an integer beginning with @samp{0x} or @samp{0X} to be
5894 hexadecimal. Alternatively the linker accepts suffixes of @samp{h} or
5895 @samp{H} for hexadecimal, @samp{o} or @samp{O} for octal, @samp{b} or
5896 @samp{B} for binary and @samp{d} or @samp{D} for decimal. Any integer
5897 value without a prefix or a suffix is considered to be decimal.
5898
5899 @cindex scaled integers
5900 @cindex K and M integer suffixes
5901 @cindex M and K integer suffixes
5902 @cindex suffixes for integers
5903 @cindex integer suffixes
5904 In addition, you can use the suffixes @code{K} and @code{M} to scale a
5905 constant by
5906 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5907 @ifnottex
5908 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5909 @code{1024} or @code{1024*1024}
5910 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5911 @end ifnottex
5912 @tex
5913 ${\rm 1024}$ or ${\rm 1024}^2$
5914 @end tex
5915 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
5916 respectively. For example, the following
5917 all refer to the same quantity:
5918
5919 @smallexample
5920 _fourk_1 = 4K;
5921 _fourk_2 = 4096;
5922 _fourk_3 = 0x1000;
5923 _fourk_4 = 10000o;
5924 @end smallexample
5925
5926 Note - the @code{K} and @code{M} suffixes cannot be used in
5927 conjunction with the base suffixes mentioned above.
5928
5929 @node Symbolic Constants
5930 @subsection Symbolic Constants
5931 @cindex symbolic constants
5932 @kindex CONSTANT
5933 It is possible to refer to target-specific constants via the use of
5934 the @code{CONSTANT(@var{name})} operator, where @var{name} is one of:
5935
5936 @table @code
5937 @item MAXPAGESIZE
5938 @kindex MAXPAGESIZE
5939 The target's maximum page size.
5940
5941 @item COMMONPAGESIZE
5942 @kindex COMMONPAGESIZE
5943 The target's default page size.
5944 @end table
5945
5946 So for example:
5947
5948 @smallexample
5949 .text ALIGN (CONSTANT (MAXPAGESIZE)) : @{ *(.text) @}
5950 @end smallexample
5951
5952 will create a text section aligned to the largest page boundary
5953 supported by the target.
5954
5955 @node Symbols
5956 @subsection Symbol Names
5957 @cindex symbol names
5958 @cindex names
5959 @cindex quoted symbol names
5960 @kindex "
5961 Unless quoted, symbol names start with a letter, underscore, or period
5962 and may include letters, digits, underscores, periods, and hyphens.
5963 Unquoted symbol names must not conflict with any keywords. You can
5964 specify a symbol which contains odd characters or has the same name as a
5965 keyword by surrounding the symbol name in double quotes:
5966 @smallexample
5967 "SECTION" = 9;
5968 "with a space" = "also with a space" + 10;
5969 @end smallexample
5970
5971 Since symbols can contain many non-alphabetic characters, it is safest
5972 to delimit symbols with spaces. For example, @samp{A-B} is one symbol,
5973 whereas @samp{A - B} is an expression involving subtraction.
5974
5975 @node Orphan Sections
5976 @subsection Orphan Sections
5977 @cindex orphan
5978 Orphan sections are sections present in the input files which
5979 are not explicitly placed into the output file by the linker
5980 script. The linker will still copy these sections into the
5981 output file by either finding, or creating a suitable output section
5982 in which to place the orphaned input section.
5983
5984 If the name of an orphaned input section exactly matches the name of
5985 an existing output section, then the orphaned input section will be
5986 placed at the end of that output section.
5987
5988 If there is no output section with a matching name then new output
5989 sections will be created. Each new output section will have the same
5990 name as the orphan section placed within it. If there are multiple
5991 orphan sections with the same name, these will all be combined into
5992 one new output section.
5993
5994 If new output sections are created to hold orphaned input sections,
5995 then the linker must decide where to place these new output sections
5996 in relation to existing output sections. On most modern targets, the
5997 linker attempts to place orphan sections after sections of the same
5998 attribute, such as code vs data, loadable vs non-loadable, etc. If no
5999 sections with matching attributes are found, or your target lacks this
6000 support, the orphan section is placed at the end of the file.
6001
6002 The command-line options @samp{--orphan-handling} and @samp{--unique}
6003 (@pxref{Options,,Command-line Options}) can be used to control which
6004 output sections an orphan is placed in.
6005
6006 @node Location Counter
6007 @subsection The Location Counter
6008 @kindex .
6009 @cindex dot
6010 @cindex location counter
6011 @cindex current output location
6012 The special linker variable @dfn{dot} @samp{.} always contains the
6013 current output location counter. Since the @code{.} always refers to a
6014 location in an output section, it may only appear in an expression
6015 within a @code{SECTIONS} command. The @code{.} symbol may appear
6016 anywhere that an ordinary symbol is allowed in an expression.
6017
6018 @cindex holes
6019 Assigning a value to @code{.} will cause the location counter to be
6020 moved. This may be used to create holes in the output section. The
6021 location counter may not be moved backwards inside an output section,
6022 and may not be moved backwards outside of an output section if so
6023 doing creates areas with overlapping LMAs.
6024
6025 @smallexample
6026 SECTIONS
6027 @{
6028 output :
6029 @{
6030 file1(.text)
6031 . = . + 1000;
6032 file2(.text)
6033 . += 1000;
6034 file3(.text)
6035 @} = 0x12345678;
6036 @}
6037 @end smallexample
6038 @noindent
6039 In the previous example, the @samp{.text} section from @file{file1} is
6040 located at the beginning of the output section @samp{output}. It is
6041 followed by a 1000 byte gap. Then the @samp{.text} section from
6042 @file{file2} appears, also with a 1000 byte gap following before the
6043 @samp{.text} section from @file{file3}. The notation @samp{= 0x12345678}
6044 specifies what data to write in the gaps (@pxref{Output Section Fill}).
6045
6046 @cindex dot inside sections
6047 Note: @code{.} actually refers to the byte offset from the start of the
6048 current containing object. Normally this is the @code{SECTIONS}
6049 statement, whose start address is 0, hence @code{.} can be used as an
6050 absolute address. If @code{.} is used inside a section description
6051 however, it refers to the byte offset from the start of that section,
6052 not an absolute address. Thus in a script like this:
6053
6054 @smallexample
6055 SECTIONS
6056 @{
6057 . = 0x100
6058 .text: @{
6059 *(.text)
6060 . = 0x200
6061 @}
6062 . = 0x500
6063 .data: @{
6064 *(.data)
6065 . += 0x600
6066 @}
6067 @}
6068 @end smallexample
6069
6070 The @samp{.text} section will be assigned a starting address of 0x100
6071 and a size of exactly 0x200 bytes, even if there is not enough data in
6072 the @samp{.text} input sections to fill this area. (If there is too
6073 much data, an error will be produced because this would be an attempt to
6074 move @code{.} backwards). The @samp{.data} section will start at 0x500
6075 and it will have an extra 0x600 bytes worth of space after the end of
6076 the values from the @samp{.data} input sections and before the end of
6077 the @samp{.data} output section itself.
6078
6079 @cindex dot outside sections
6080 Setting symbols to the value of the location counter outside of an
6081 output section statement can result in unexpected values if the linker
6082 needs to place orphan sections. For example, given the following:
6083
6084 @smallexample
6085 SECTIONS
6086 @{
6087 start_of_text = . ;
6088 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6089 end_of_text = . ;
6090
6091 start_of_data = . ;
6092 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6093 end_of_data = . ;
6094 @}
6095 @end smallexample
6096
6097 If the linker needs to place some input section, e.g. @code{.rodata},
6098 not mentioned in the script, it might choose to place that section
6099 between @code{.text} and @code{.data}. You might think the linker
6100 should place @code{.rodata} on the blank line in the above script, but
6101 blank lines are of no particular significance to the linker. As well,
6102 the linker doesn't associate the above symbol names with their
6103 sections. Instead, it assumes that all assignments or other
6104 statements belong to the previous output section, except for the
6105 special case of an assignment to @code{.}. I.e., the linker will
6106 place the orphan @code{.rodata} section as if the script was written
6107 as follows:
6108
6109 @smallexample
6110 SECTIONS
6111 @{
6112 start_of_text = . ;
6113 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6114 end_of_text = . ;
6115
6116 start_of_data = . ;
6117 .rodata: @{ *(.rodata) @}
6118 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6119 end_of_data = . ;
6120 @}
6121 @end smallexample
6122
6123 This may or may not be the script author's intention for the value of
6124 @code{start_of_data}. One way to influence the orphan section
6125 placement is to assign the location counter to itself, as the linker
6126 assumes that an assignment to @code{.} is setting the start address of
6127 a following output section and thus should be grouped with that
6128 section. So you could write:
6129
6130 @smallexample
6131 SECTIONS
6132 @{
6133 start_of_text = . ;
6134 .text: @{ *(.text) @}
6135 end_of_text = . ;
6136
6137 . = . ;
6138 start_of_data = . ;
6139 .data: @{ *(.data) @}
6140 end_of_data = . ;
6141 @}
6142 @end smallexample
6143
6144 Now, the orphan @code{.rodata} section will be placed between
6145 @code{end_of_text} and @code{start_of_data}.
6146
6147 @need 2000
6148 @node Operators
6149 @subsection Operators
6150 @cindex operators for arithmetic
6151 @cindex arithmetic operators
6152 @cindex precedence in expressions
6153 The linker recognizes the standard C set of arithmetic operators, with
6154 the standard bindings and precedence levels:
6155 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6156 @ifnottex
6157 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6158 @smallexample
6159 precedence associativity Operators Notes
6160 (highest)
6161 1 left ! - ~ (1)
6162 2 left * / %
6163 3 left + -
6164 4 left >> <<
6165 5 left == != > < <= >=
6166 6 left &
6167 7 left |
6168 8 left &&
6169 9 left ||
6170 10 right ? :
6171 11 right &= += -= *= /= (2)
6172 (lowest)
6173 @end smallexample
6174 Notes:
6175 (1) Prefix operators
6176 (2) @xref{Assignments}.
6177 @c TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6178 @end ifnottex
6179 @tex
6180 \vskip \baselineskip
6181 %"lispnarrowing" is the extra indent used generally for smallexample
6182 \hskip\lispnarrowing\vbox{\offinterlineskip
6183 \hrule
6184 \halign
6185 {\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ #\ \hfil&\vrule#&\strut\hfil\ {\tt #}\ \hfil&\vrule#\cr
6186 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6187 &Precedence&& Associativity &&{\rm Operators}&\cr
6188 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6189 \noalign{\hrule}
6190 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr
6191 &highest&&&&&\cr
6192 % '176 is tilde, '~' in tt font
6193 &1&&left&&\qquad- \char'176\ !\qquad\dag&\cr
6194 &2&&left&&* / \%&\cr
6195 &3&&left&&+ -&\cr
6196 &4&&left&&>> <<&\cr
6197 &5&&left&&== != > < <= >=&\cr
6198 &6&&left&&\&&\cr
6199 &7&&left&&|&\cr
6200 &8&&left&&{\&\&}&\cr
6201 &9&&left&&||&\cr
6202 &10&&right&&? :&\cr
6203 &11&&right&&\qquad\&= += -= *= /=\qquad\ddag&\cr
6204 &lowest&&&&&\cr
6205 height2pt&\omit&&\omit&&\omit&\cr}
6206 \hrule}
6207 @end tex
6208 @iftex
6209 {
6210 @obeylines@parskip=0pt@parindent=0pt
6211 @dag@quad Prefix operators.
6212 @ddag@quad @xref{Assignments}.
6213 }
6214 @end iftex
6215 @c END TEXI2ROFF-KILL
6216
6217 @node Evaluation
6218 @subsection Evaluation
6219 @cindex lazy evaluation
6220 @cindex expression evaluation order
6221 The linker evaluates expressions lazily. It only computes the value of
6222 an expression when absolutely necessary.
6223
6224 The linker needs some information, such as the value of the start
6225 address of the first section, and the origins and lengths of memory
6226 regions, in order to do any linking at all. These values are computed
6227 as soon as possible when the linker reads in the linker script.
6228
6229 However, other values (such as symbol values) are not known or needed
6230 until after storage allocation. Such values are evaluated later, when
6231 other information (such as the sizes of output sections) is available
6232 for use in the symbol assignment expression.
6233
6234 The sizes of sections cannot be known until after allocation, so
6235 assignments dependent upon these are not performed until after
6236 allocation.
6237
6238 Some expressions, such as those depending upon the location counter
6239 @samp{.}, must be evaluated during section allocation.
6240
6241 If the result of an expression is required, but the value is not
6242 available, then an error results. For example, a script like the
6243 following
6244 @smallexample
6245 @group
6246 SECTIONS
6247 @{
6248 .text 9+this_isnt_constant :
6249 @{ *(.text) @}
6250 @}
6251 @end group
6252 @end smallexample
6253 @noindent
6254 will cause the error message @samp{non constant expression for initial
6255 address}.
6256
6257 @node Expression Section
6258 @subsection The Section of an Expression
6259 @cindex expression sections
6260 @cindex absolute expressions
6261 @cindex relative expressions
6262 @cindex absolute and relocatable symbols
6263 @cindex relocatable and absolute symbols
6264 @cindex symbols, relocatable and absolute
6265 Addresses and symbols may be section relative, or absolute. A section
6266 relative symbol is relocatable. If you request relocatable output
6267 using the @samp{-r} option, a further link operation may change the
6268 value of a section relative symbol. On the other hand, an absolute
6269 symbol will retain the same value throughout any further link
6270 operations.
6271
6272 Some terms in linker expressions are addresses. This is true of
6273 section relative symbols and for builtin functions that return an
6274 address, such as @code{ADDR}, @code{LOADADDR}, @code{ORIGIN} and
6275 @code{SEGMENT_START}. Other terms are simply numbers, or are builtin
6276 functions that return a non-address value, such as @code{LENGTH}.
6277 One complication is that unless you set @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")}
6278 (@pxref{Miscellaneous Commands}), numbers and absolute symbols are treated
6279 differently depending on their location, for compatibility with older
6280 versions of @code{ld}. Expressions appearing outside an output
6281 section definition treat all numbers as absolute addresses.
6282 Expressions appearing inside an output section definition treat
6283 absolute symbols as numbers. If @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} is
6284 given, then absolute symbols and numbers are simply treated as numbers
6285 everywhere.
6286
6287 In the following simple example,
6288
6289 @smallexample
6290 @group
6291 SECTIONS
6292 @{
6293 . = 0x100;
6294 __executable_start = 0x100;
6295 .data :
6296 @{
6297 . = 0x10;
6298 __data_start = 0x10;
6299 *(.data)
6300 @}
6301 @dots{}
6302 @}
6303 @end group
6304 @end smallexample
6305
6306 both @code{.} and @code{__executable_start} are set to the absolute
6307 address 0x100 in the first two assignments, then both @code{.} and
6308 @code{__data_start} are set to 0x10 relative to the @code{.data}
6309 section in the second two assignments.
6310
6311 For expressions involving numbers, relative addresses and absolute
6312 addresses, ld follows these rules to evaluate terms:
6313
6314 @itemize @bullet
6315 @item
6316 Unary operations on an absolute address or number, and binary
6317 operations on two absolute addresses or two numbers, or between one
6318 absolute address and a number, apply the operator to the value(s).
6319 @item
6320 Unary operations on a relative address, and binary operations on two
6321 relative addresses in the same section or between one relative address
6322 and a number, apply the operator to the offset part of the address(es).
6323 @item
6324 Other binary operations, that is, between two relative addresses not
6325 in the same section, or between a relative address and an absolute
6326 address, first convert any non-absolute term to an absolute address
6327 before applying the operator.
6328 @end itemize
6329
6330 The result section of each sub-expression is as follows:
6331
6332 @itemize @bullet
6333 @item
6334 An operation involving only numbers results in a number.
6335 @item
6336 The result of comparisons, @samp{&&} and @samp{||} is also a number.
6337 @item
6338 The result of other binary arithmetic and logical operations on two
6339 relative addresses in the same section or two absolute addresses
6340 (after above conversions) is also a number when
6341 @code{LD_FEATURE ("SANE_EXPR")} or inside an output section definition
6342 but an absolute address otherwise.
6343 @item
6344 The result of other operations on relative addresses or one
6345 relative address and a number, is a relative address in the same
6346 section as the relative operand(s).
6347 @item
6348 The result of other operations on absolute addresses (after above
6349 conversions) is an absolute address.
6350 @end itemize
6351
6352 You can use the builtin function @code{ABSOLUTE} to force an expression
6353 to be absolute when it would otherwise be relative. For example, to
6354 create an absolute symbol set to the address of the end of the output
6355 section @samp{.data}:
6356 @smallexample
6357 SECTIONS
6358 @{
6359 .data : @{ *(.data) _edata = ABSOLUTE(.); @}
6360 @}
6361 @end smallexample
6362 @noindent
6363 If @samp{ABSOLUTE} were not used, @samp{_edata} would be relative to the
6364 @samp{.data} section.
6365
6366 Using @code{LOADADDR} also forces an expression absolute, since this
6367 particular builtin function returns an absolute address.
6368
6369 @node Builtin Functions
6370 @subsection Builtin Functions
6371 @cindex functions in expressions
6372 The linker script language includes a number of builtin functions for
6373 use in linker script expressions.
6374
6375 @table @code
6376 @item ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6377 @kindex ABSOLUTE(@var{exp})
6378 @cindex expression, absolute
6379 Return the absolute (non-relocatable, as opposed to non-negative) value
6380 of the expression @var{exp}. Primarily useful to assign an absolute
6381 value to a symbol within a section definition, where symbol values are
6382 normally section relative. @xref{Expression Section}.
6383
6384 @item ADDR(@var{section})
6385 @kindex ADDR(@var{section})
6386 @cindex section address in expression
6387 Return the address (VMA) of the named @var{section}. Your
6388 script must previously have defined the location of that section. In
6389 the following example, @code{start_of_output_1}, @code{symbol_1} and
6390 @code{symbol_2} are assigned equivalent values, except that
6391 @code{symbol_1} will be relative to the @code{.output1} section while
6392 the other two will be absolute:
6393 @smallexample
6394 @group
6395 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6396 .output1 :
6397 @{
6398 start_of_output_1 = ABSOLUTE(.);
6399 @dots{}
6400 @}
6401 .output :
6402 @{
6403 symbol_1 = ADDR(.output1);
6404 symbol_2 = start_of_output_1;
6405 @}
6406 @dots{} @}
6407 @end group
6408 @end smallexample
6409
6410 @item ALIGN(@var{align})
6411 @itemx ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6412 @kindex ALIGN(@var{align})
6413 @kindex ALIGN(@var{exp},@var{align})
6414 @cindex round up location counter
6415 @cindex align location counter
6416 @cindex round up expression
6417 @cindex align expression
6418 Return the location counter (@code{.}) or arbitrary expression aligned
6419 to the next @var{align} boundary. The single operand @code{ALIGN}
6420 doesn't change the value of the location counter---it just does
6421 arithmetic on it. The two operand @code{ALIGN} allows an arbitrary
6422 expression to be aligned upwards (@code{ALIGN(@var{align})} is
6423 equivalent to @code{ALIGN(ABSOLUTE(.), @var{align})}).
6424
6425 Here is an example which aligns the output @code{.data} section to the
6426 next @code{0x2000} byte boundary after the preceding section and sets a
6427 variable within the section to the next @code{0x8000} boundary after the
6428 input sections:
6429 @smallexample
6430 @group
6431 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6432 .data ALIGN(0x2000): @{
6433 *(.data)
6434 variable = ALIGN(0x8000);
6435 @}
6436 @dots{} @}
6437 @end group
6438 @end smallexample
6439 @noindent
6440 The first use of @code{ALIGN} in this example specifies the location of
6441 a section because it is used as the optional @var{address} attribute of
6442 a section definition (@pxref{Output Section Address}). The second use
6443 of @code{ALIGN} is used to defines the value of a symbol.
6444
6445 The builtin function @code{NEXT} is closely related to @code{ALIGN}.
6446
6447 @item ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6448 @kindex ALIGNOF(@var{section})
6449 @cindex section alignment
6450 Return the alignment in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6451 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6452 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6453 the alignment of the @code{.output} section is stored as the first
6454 value in that section.
6455 @smallexample
6456 @group
6457 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6458 .output @{
6459 LONG (ALIGNOF (.output))
6460 @dots{}
6461 @}
6462 @dots{} @}
6463 @end group
6464 @end smallexample
6465
6466 @item BLOCK(@var{exp})
6467 @kindex BLOCK(@var{exp})
6468 This is a synonym for @code{ALIGN}, for compatibility with older linker
6469 scripts. It is most often seen when setting the address of an output
6470 section.
6471
6472 @item DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6473 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}, @var{commonpagesize})
6474 This is equivalent to either
6475 @smallexample
6476 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize}) + (. & (@var{maxpagesize} - 1)))
6477 @end smallexample
6478 or
6479 @smallexample
6480 (ALIGN(@var{maxpagesize})
6481 + ((. + @var{commonpagesize} - 1) & (@var{maxpagesize} - @var{commonpagesize})))
6482 @end smallexample
6483 @noindent
6484 depending on whether the latter uses fewer @var{commonpagesize} sized pages
6485 for the data segment (area between the result of this expression and
6486 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}) than the former or not.
6487 If the latter form is used, it means @var{commonpagesize} bytes of runtime
6488 memory will be saved at the expense of up to @var{commonpagesize} wasted
6489 bytes in the on-disk file.
6490
6491 This expression can only be used directly in @code{SECTIONS} commands, not in
6492 any output section descriptions and only once in the linker script.
6493 @var{commonpagesize} should be less or equal to @var{maxpagesize} and should
6494 be the system page size the object wants to be optimized for while still
6495 running on system page sizes up to @var{maxpagesize}. Note however
6496 that @samp{-z relro} protection will not be effective if the system
6497 page size is larger than @var{commonpagesize}.
6498
6499 @noindent
6500 Example:
6501 @smallexample
6502 . = DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN(0x10000, 0x2000);
6503 @end smallexample
6504
6505 @item DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6506 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_END(@var{exp})
6507 This defines the end of data segment for @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}
6508 evaluation purposes.
6509
6510 @smallexample
6511 . = DATA_SEGMENT_END(.);
6512 @end smallexample
6513
6514 @item DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6515 @kindex DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(@var{offset}, @var{exp})
6516 This defines the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment when
6517 @samp{-z relro} option is used.
6518 When @samp{-z relro} option is not present, @code{DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END}
6519 does nothing, otherwise @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} is padded so that
6520 @var{exp} + @var{offset} is aligned to the @var{commonpagesize}
6521 argument given to @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN}. If present in the linker
6522 script, it must be placed between @code{DATA_SEGMENT_ALIGN} and
6523 @code{DATA_SEGMENT_END}. Evaluates to the second argument plus any
6524 padding needed at the end of the @code{PT_GNU_RELRO} segment due to
6525 section alignment.
6526
6527 @smallexample
6528 . = DATA_SEGMENT_RELRO_END(24, .);
6529 @end smallexample
6530
6531 @item DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6532 @kindex DEFINED(@var{symbol})
6533 @cindex symbol defaults
6534 Return 1 if @var{symbol} is in the linker global symbol table and is
6535 defined before the statement using DEFINED in the script, otherwise
6536 return 0. You can use this function to provide
6537 default values for symbols. For example, the following script fragment
6538 shows how to set a global symbol @samp{begin} to the first location in
6539 the @samp{.text} section---but if a symbol called @samp{begin} already
6540 existed, its value is preserved:
6541
6542 @smallexample
6543 @group
6544 SECTIONS @{ @dots{}
6545 .text : @{
6546 begin = DEFINED(begin) ? begin : . ;
6547 @dots{}
6548 @}
6549 @dots{}
6550 @}
6551 @end group
6552 @end smallexample
6553
6554 @item LENGTH(@var{memory})
6555 @kindex LENGTH(@var{memory})
6556 Return the length of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6557
6558 @item LOADADDR(@var{section})
6559 @kindex LOADADDR(@var{section})
6560 @cindex section load address in expression
6561 Return the absolute LMA of the named @var{section}. (@pxref{Output
6562 Section LMA}).
6563
6564 @item LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6565 @kindex LOG2CEIL(@var{exp})
6566 Return the binary logarithm of @var{exp} rounded towards infinity.
6567 @code{LOG2CEIL(0)} returns 0.
6568
6569 @kindex MAX
6570 @item MAX(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6571 Returns the maximum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6572
6573 @kindex MIN
6574 @item MIN(@var{exp1}, @var{exp2})
6575 Returns the minimum of @var{exp1} and @var{exp2}.
6576
6577 @item NEXT(@var{exp})
6578 @kindex NEXT(@var{exp})
6579 @cindex unallocated address, next
6580 Return the next unallocated address that is a multiple of @var{exp}.
6581 This function is closely related to @code{ALIGN(@var{exp})}; unless you
6582 use the @code{MEMORY} command to define discontinuous memory for the
6583 output file, the two functions are equivalent.
6584
6585 @item ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6586 @kindex ORIGIN(@var{memory})
6587 Return the origin of the memory region named @var{memory}.
6588
6589 @item SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6590 @kindex SEGMENT_START(@var{segment}, @var{default})
6591 Return the base address of the named @var{segment}. If an explicit
6592 value has already been given for this segment (with a command-line
6593 @samp{-T} option) then that value will be returned otherwise the value
6594 will be @var{default}. At present, the @samp{-T} command-line option
6595 can only be used to set the base address for the ``text'', ``data'', and
6596 ``bss'' sections, but you can use @code{SEGMENT_START} with any segment
6597 name.
6598
6599 @item SIZEOF(@var{section})
6600 @kindex SIZEOF(@var{section})
6601 @cindex section size
6602 Return the size in bytes of the named @var{section}, if that section has
6603 been allocated. If the section has not been allocated when this is
6604 evaluated, the linker will report an error. In the following example,
6605 @code{symbol_1} and @code{symbol_2} are assigned identical values:
6606 @smallexample
6607 @group
6608 SECTIONS@{ @dots{}
6609 .output @{
6610 .start = . ;
6611 @dots{}
6612 .end = . ;
6613 @}
6614 symbol_1 = .end - .start ;
6615 symbol_2 = SIZEOF(.output);
6616 @dots{} @}
6617 @end group
6618 @end smallexample
6619
6620 @item SIZEOF_HEADERS
6621 @itemx sizeof_headers
6622 @kindex SIZEOF_HEADERS
6623 @cindex header size
6624 Return the size in bytes of the output file's headers. This is
6625 information which appears at the start of the output file. You can use
6626 this number when setting the start address of the first section, if you
6627 choose, to facilitate paging.
6628
6629 @cindex not enough room for program headers
6630 @cindex program headers, not enough room
6631 When producing an ELF output file, if the linker script uses the
6632 @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} builtin function, the linker must compute the
6633 number of program headers before it has determined all the section
6634 addresses and sizes. If the linker later discovers that it needs
6635 additional program headers, it will report an error @samp{not enough
6636 room for program headers}. To avoid this error, you must avoid using
6637 the @code{SIZEOF_HEADERS} function, or you must rework your linker
6638 script to avoid forcing the linker to use additional program headers, or
6639 you must define the program headers yourself using the @code{PHDRS}
6640 command (@pxref{PHDRS}).
6641 @end table
6642
6643 @node Implicit Linker Scripts
6644 @section Implicit Linker Scripts
6645 @cindex implicit linker scripts
6646 If you specify a linker input file which the linker can not recognize as
6647 an object file or an archive file, it will try to read the file as a
6648 linker script. If the file can not be parsed as a linker script, the
6649 linker will report an error.
6650
6651 An implicit linker script will not replace the default linker script.
6652
6653 Typically an implicit linker script would contain only symbol
6654 assignments, or the @code{INPUT}, @code{GROUP}, or @code{VERSION}
6655 commands.
6656
6657 Any input files read because of an implicit linker script will be read
6658 at the position in the command line where the implicit linker script was
6659 read. This can affect archive searching.
6660
6661 @ifset GENERIC
6662 @node Machine Dependent
6663 @chapter Machine Dependent Features
6664
6665 @cindex machine dependencies
6666 @command{ld} has additional features on some platforms; the following
6667 sections describe them. Machines where @command{ld} has no additional
6668 functionality are not listed.
6669
6670 @menu
6671 @ifset H8300
6672 * H8/300:: @command{ld} and the H8/300
6673 @end ifset
6674 @ifset M68HC11
6675 * M68HC11/68HC12:: @code{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6676 @end ifset
6677 @ifset ARM
6678 * ARM:: @command{ld} and the ARM family
6679 @end ifset
6680 @ifset HPPA
6681 * HPPA ELF32:: @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF
6682 @end ifset
6683 @ifset M68K
6684 * M68K:: @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
6685 @end ifset
6686 @ifset MIPS
6687 * MIPS:: @command{ld} and the MIPS family
6688 @end ifset
6689 @ifset MMIX
6690 * MMIX:: @command{ld} and MMIX
6691 @end ifset
6692 @ifset MSP430
6693 * MSP430:: @command{ld} and MSP430
6694 @end ifset
6695 @ifset NDS32
6696 * NDS32:: @command{ld} and NDS32
6697 @end ifset
6698 @ifset NIOSII
6699 * Nios II:: @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
6700 @end ifset
6701 @ifset POWERPC
6702 * PowerPC ELF32:: @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
6703 @end ifset
6704 @ifset POWERPC64
6705 * PowerPC64 ELF64:: @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
6706 @end ifset
6707 @ifset S/390
6708 * S/390 ELF:: @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
6709 @end ifset
6710 @ifset SPU
6711 * SPU ELF:: @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
6712 @end ifset
6713 @ifset TICOFF
6714 * TI COFF:: @command{ld} and TI COFF
6715 @end ifset
6716 @ifset WIN32
6717 * WIN32:: @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
6718 @end ifset
6719 @ifset XTENSA
6720 * Xtensa:: @command{ld} and Xtensa Processors
6721 @end ifset
6722 @end menu
6723 @end ifset
6724
6725 @ifset H8300
6726 @ifclear GENERIC
6727 @raisesections
6728 @end ifclear
6729
6730 @node H8/300
6731 @section @command{ld} and the H8/300
6732
6733 @cindex H8/300 support
6734 For the H8/300, @command{ld} can perform these global optimizations when
6735 you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6736
6737 @table @emph
6738 @cindex relaxing on H8/300
6739 @item relaxing address modes
6740 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6741 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6742 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6743 respectively.
6744
6745 @cindex synthesizing on H8/300
6746 @item synthesizing instructions
6747 @c FIXME: specifically mov.b, or any mov instructions really? -> mov.b only, at least on H8, H8H, H8S
6748 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov.b} instructions which use the
6749 sixteen-bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6750 page of memory, and changes them to use the eight-bit address form.
6751 (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:16} into
6752 @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in the
6753 top page of memory).
6754
6755 @command{ld} finds all @code{mov} instructions which use the register
6756 indirect with 32-bit displacement addressing mode, but use a small
6757 displacement inside 16-bit displacement range, and changes them to use
6758 the 16-bit displacement form. (That is: the linker turns @samp{mov.b
6759 @code{@@}@var{d}:32,ERx} into @samp{mov.b @code{@@}@var{d}:16,ERx}
6760 whenever the displacement @var{d} is in the 16 bit signed integer
6761 range. Only implemented in ELF-format ld).
6762
6763 @item bit manipulation instructions
6764 @command{ld} finds all bit manipulation instructions like @code{band, bclr,
6765 biand, bild, bior, bist, bixor, bld, bnot, bor, bset, bst, btst, bxor}
6766 which use 32 bit and 16 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top
6767 page of memory, and changes them to use the 8 bit address form.
6768 (That is: the linker turns @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:32} into
6769 @samp{bset #xx:3,@code{@@}@var{aa}:8} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6770 the top page of memory).
6771
6772 @item system control instructions
6773 @command{ld} finds all @code{ldc.w, stc.w} instructions which use the
6774 32 bit absolute address form, but refer to the top page of memory, and
6775 changes them to use 16 bit address form.
6776 (That is: the linker turns @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:32,ccr} into
6777 @samp{ldc.w @code{@@}@var{aa}:16,ccr} whenever the address @var{aa} is in
6778 the top page of memory).
6779 @end table
6780
6781 @ifclear GENERIC
6782 @lowersections
6783 @end ifclear
6784 @end ifset
6785
6786 @ifclear GENERIC
6787 @ifset Renesas
6788 @c This stuff is pointless to say unless you're especially concerned
6789 @c with Renesas chips; don't enable it for generic case, please.
6790 @node Renesas
6791 @chapter @command{ld} and Other Renesas Chips
6792
6793 @command{ld} also supports the Renesas (formerly Hitachi) H8/300H,
6794 H8/500, and SH chips. No special features, commands, or command-line
6795 options are required for these chips.
6796 @end ifset
6797 @end ifclear
6798
6799 @ifset ARM
6800 @ifclear GENERIC
6801 @raisesections
6802 @end ifclear
6803
6804 @ifset M68HC11
6805 @ifclear GENERIC
6806 @raisesections
6807 @end ifclear
6808
6809 @node M68HC11/68HC12
6810 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68HC11 and 68HC12 families
6811
6812 @cindex M68HC11 and 68HC12 support
6813
6814 @subsection Linker Relaxation
6815
6816 For the Motorola 68HC11, @command{ld} can perform these global
6817 optimizations when you specify the @samp{--relax} command-line option.
6818
6819 @table @emph
6820 @cindex relaxing on M68HC11
6821 @item relaxing address modes
6822 @command{ld} finds all @code{jsr} and @code{jmp} instructions whose
6823 targets are within eight bits, and turns them into eight-bit
6824 program-counter relative @code{bsr} and @code{bra} instructions,
6825 respectively.
6826
6827 @command{ld} also looks at all 16-bit extended addressing modes and
6828 transforms them in a direct addressing mode when the address is in
6829 page 0 (between 0 and 0x0ff).
6830
6831 @item relaxing gcc instruction group
6832 When @command{gcc} is called with @option{-mrelax}, it can emit group
6833 of instructions that the linker can optimize to use a 68HC11 direct
6834 addressing mode. These instructions consists of @code{bclr} or
6835 @code{bset} instructions.
6836
6837 @end table
6838
6839 @subsection Trampoline Generation
6840
6841 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC11
6842 @cindex trampoline generation on M68HC12
6843 For 68HC11 and 68HC12, @command{ld} can generate trampoline code to
6844 call a far function using a normal @code{jsr} instruction. The linker
6845 will also change the relocation to some far function to use the
6846 trampoline address instead of the function address. This is typically the
6847 case when a pointer to a function is taken. The pointer will in fact
6848 point to the function trampoline.
6849
6850 @ifclear GENERIC
6851 @lowersections
6852 @end ifclear
6853 @end ifset
6854
6855 @node ARM
6856 @section @command{ld} and the ARM family
6857
6858 @cindex ARM interworking support
6859 @kindex --support-old-code
6860 For the ARM, @command{ld} will generate code stubs to allow functions calls
6861 between ARM and Thumb code. These stubs only work with code that has
6862 been compiled and assembled with the @samp{-mthumb-interwork} command
6863 line option. If it is necessary to link with old ARM object files or
6864 libraries, which have not been compiled with the -mthumb-interwork
6865 option then the @samp{--support-old-code} command-line switch should be
6866 given to the linker. This will make it generate larger stub functions
6867 which will work with non-interworking aware ARM code. Note, however,
6868 the linker does not support generating stubs for function calls to
6869 non-interworking aware Thumb code.
6870
6871 @cindex thumb entry point
6872 @cindex entry point, thumb
6873 @kindex --thumb-entry=@var{entry}
6874 The @samp{--thumb-entry} switch is a duplicate of the generic
6875 @samp{--entry} switch, in that it sets the program's starting address.
6876 But it also sets the bottom bit of the address, so that it can be
6877 branched to using a BX instruction, and the program will start
6878 executing in Thumb mode straight away.
6879
6880 @cindex PE import table prefixing
6881 @kindex --use-nul-prefixed-import-tables
6882 The @samp{--use-nul-prefixed-import-tables} switch is specifying, that
6883 the import tables idata4 and idata5 have to be generated with a zero
6884 element prefix for import libraries. This is the old style to generate
6885 import tables. By default this option is turned off.
6886
6887 @cindex BE8
6888 @kindex --be8
6889 The @samp{--be8} switch instructs @command{ld} to generate BE8 format
6890 executables. This option is only valid when linking big-endian
6891 objects - ie ones which have been assembled with the @option{-EB}
6892 option. The resulting image will contain big-endian data and
6893 little-endian code.
6894
6895 @cindex TARGET1
6896 @kindex --target1-rel
6897 @kindex --target1-abs
6898 The @samp{R_ARM_TARGET1} relocation is typically used for entries in the
6899 @samp{.init_array} section. It is interpreted as either @samp{R_ARM_REL32}
6900 or @samp{R_ARM_ABS32}, depending on the target. The @samp{--target1-rel}
6901 and @samp{--target1-abs} switches override the default.
6902
6903 @cindex TARGET2
6904 @kindex --target2=@var{type}
6905 The @samp{--target2=type} switch overrides the default definition of the
6906 @samp{R_ARM_TARGET2} relocation. Valid values for @samp{type}, their
6907 meanings, and target defaults are as follows:
6908 @table @samp
6909 @item rel
6910 @samp{R_ARM_REL32} (arm*-*-elf, arm*-*-eabi)
6911 @item abs
6912 @samp{R_ARM_ABS32} (arm*-*-symbianelf)
6913 @item got-rel
6914 @samp{R_ARM_GOT_PREL} (arm*-*-linux, arm*-*-*bsd)
6915 @end table
6916
6917 @cindex FIX_V4BX
6918 @kindex --fix-v4bx
6919 The @samp{R_ARM_V4BX} relocation (defined by the ARM AAELF
6920 specification) enables objects compiled for the ARMv4 architecture to be
6921 interworking-safe when linked with other objects compiled for ARMv4t, but
6922 also allows pure ARMv4 binaries to be built from the same ARMv4 objects.
6923
6924 In the latter case, the switch @option{--fix-v4bx} must be passed to the
6925 linker, which causes v4t @code{BX rM} instructions to be rewritten as
6926 @code{MOV PC,rM}, since v4 processors do not have a @code{BX} instruction.
6927
6928 In the former case, the switch should not be used, and @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6929 relocations are ignored.
6930
6931 @cindex FIX_V4BX_INTERWORKING
6932 @kindex --fix-v4bx-interworking
6933 Replace @code{BX rM} instructions identified by @samp{R_ARM_V4BX}
6934 relocations with a branch to the following veneer:
6935
6936 @smallexample
6937 TST rM, #1
6938 MOVEQ PC, rM
6939 BX Rn
6940 @end smallexample
6941
6942 This allows generation of libraries/applications that work on ARMv4 cores
6943 and are still interworking safe. Note that the above veneer clobbers the
6944 condition flags, so may cause incorrect program behavior in rare cases.
6945
6946 @cindex USE_BLX
6947 @kindex --use-blx
6948 The @samp{--use-blx} switch enables the linker to use ARM/Thumb
6949 BLX instructions (available on ARMv5t and above) in various
6950 situations. Currently it is used to perform calls via the PLT from Thumb
6951 code using BLX rather than using BX and a mode-switching stub before
6952 each PLT entry. This should lead to such calls executing slightly faster.
6953
6954 This option is enabled implicitly for SymbianOS, so there is no need to
6955 specify it if you are using that target.
6956
6957 @cindex VFP11_DENORM_FIX
6958 @kindex --vfp11-denorm-fix
6959 The @samp{--vfp11-denorm-fix} switch enables a link-time workaround for a
6960 bug in certain VFP11 coprocessor hardware, which sometimes allows
6961 instructions with denorm operands (which must be handled by support code)
6962 to have those operands overwritten by subsequent instructions before
6963 the support code can read the intended values.
6964
6965 The bug may be avoided in scalar mode if you allow at least one
6966 intervening instruction between a VFP11 instruction which uses a register
6967 and another instruction which writes to the same register, or at least two
6968 intervening instructions if vector mode is in use. The bug only affects
6969 full-compliance floating-point mode: you do not need this workaround if
6970 you are using "runfast" mode. Please contact ARM for further details.
6971
6972 If you know you are using buggy VFP11 hardware, you can
6973 enable this workaround by specifying the linker option
6974 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=scalar} if you are using the VFP11 scalar
6975 mode only, or @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=vector} if you are using
6976 vector mode (the latter also works for scalar code). The default is
6977 @samp{--vfp-denorm-fix=none}.
6978
6979 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
6980 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
6981 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists of the
6982 first instruction of the sequence and a branch back to the subsequent
6983 instruction. The original instruction is then replaced with a branch to
6984 the veneer. The extra cycles required to call and return from the veneer
6985 are sufficient to avoid the erratum in both the scalar and vector cases.
6986
6987 @cindex ARM1176 erratum workaround
6988 @kindex --fix-arm1176
6989 @kindex --no-fix-arm1176
6990 The @samp{--fix-arm1176} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum
6991 in certain ARM1176 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you
6992 are targeting ARM v6 (excluding ARM v6T2) or earlier. It can be disabled
6993 unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-arm1176}.
6994
6995 Further information is available in the ``ARM1176JZ-S and ARM1176JZF-S
6996 Programmer Advice Notice'' available on the ARM documentation website at:
6997 http://infocenter.arm.com/.
6998
6999 @cindex STM32L4xx erratum workaround
7000 @kindex --fix-stm32l4xx-629360
7001
7002 The @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360} switch enables a link-time
7003 workaround for a bug in the bus matrix / memory controller for some of
7004 the STM32 Cortex-M4 based products (STM32L4xx). When accessing
7005 off-chip memory via the affected bus for bus reads of 9 words or more,
7006 the bus can generate corrupt data and/or abort. These are only
7007 core-initiated accesses (not DMA), and might affect any access:
7008 integer loads such as LDM, POP and floating-point loads such as VLDM,
7009 VPOP. Stores are not affected.
7010
7011 The bug can be avoided by splitting memory accesses into the
7012 necessary chunks to keep bus reads below 8 words.
7013
7014 The workaround is not enabled by default, this is equivalent to use
7015 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=none}. If you know you are using buggy
7016 STM32L4xx hardware, you can enable the workaround by specifying the
7017 linker option @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360}, or the equivalent
7018 @samp{--fix-stm32l4xx-629360=default}.
7019
7020 If the workaround is enabled, instructions are scanned for
7021 potentially-troublesome sequences, and a veneer is created for each
7022 such sequence which may trigger the erratum. The veneer consists in a
7023 replacement sequence emulating the behaviour of the original one and a
7024 branch back to the subsequent instruction. The original instruction is
7025 then replaced with a branch to the veneer.
7026
7027 The workaround does not always preserve the memory access order for
7028 the LDMDB instruction, when the instruction loads the PC.
7029
7030 The workaround is not able to handle problematic instructions when
7031 they are in the middle of an IT block, since a branch is not allowed
7032 there. In that case, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7033 occurs.
7034
7035 The workaround is not able to replace problematic instructions with a
7036 PC-relative branch instruction if the @samp{.text} section is too
7037 large. In that case, when the branch that replaces the original code
7038 cannot be encoded, the linker reports a warning and no replacement
7039 occurs.
7040
7041 @cindex NO_ENUM_SIZE_WARNING
7042 @kindex --no-enum-size-warning
7043 The @option{--no-enum-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7044 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7045 enumeration size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7046 linking of an object file using 32-bit enumeration values with another
7047 using enumeration values fitted into the smallest possible space will
7048 not be diagnosed.
7049
7050 @cindex NO_WCHAR_SIZE_WARNING
7051 @kindex --no-wchar-size-warning
7052 The @option{--no-wchar-size-warning} switch prevents the linker from
7053 warning when linking object files that specify incompatible EABI
7054 @code{wchar_t} size attributes. For example, with this switch enabled,
7055 linking of an object file using 32-bit @code{wchar_t} values with another
7056 using 16-bit @code{wchar_t} values will not be diagnosed.
7057
7058 @cindex PIC_VENEER
7059 @kindex --pic-veneer
7060 The @samp{--pic-veneer} switch makes the linker use PIC sequences for
7061 ARM/Thumb interworking veneers, even if the rest of the binary
7062 is not PIC. This avoids problems on uClinux targets where
7063 @samp{--emit-relocs} is used to generate relocatable binaries.
7064
7065 @cindex STUB_GROUP_SIZE
7066 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7067 The linker will automatically generate and insert small sequences of
7068 code into a linked ARM ELF executable whenever an attempt is made to
7069 perform a function call to a symbol that is too far away. The
7070 placement of these sequences of instructions - called stubs - is
7071 controlled by the command-line option @option{--stub-group-size=N}.
7072 The placement is important because a poor choice can create a need for
7073 duplicate stubs, increasing the code size. The linker will try to
7074 group stubs together in order to reduce interruptions to the flow of
7075 code, but it needs guidance as to how big these groups should be and
7076 where they should be placed.
7077
7078 The value of @samp{N}, the parameter to the
7079 @option{--stub-group-size=} option controls where the stub groups are
7080 placed. If it is negative then all stubs are placed after the first
7081 branch that needs them. If it is positive then the stubs can be
7082 placed either before or after the branches that need them. If the
7083 value of @samp{N} is 1 (either +1 or -1) then the linker will choose
7084 exactly where to place groups of stubs, using its built in heuristics.
7085 A value of @samp{N} greater than 1 (or smaller than -1) tells the
7086 linker that a single group of stubs can service at most @samp{N} bytes
7087 from the input sections.
7088
7089 The default, if @option{--stub-group-size=} is not specified, is
7090 @samp{N = +1}.
7091
7092 Farcalls stubs insertion is fully supported for the ARM-EABI target
7093 only, because it relies on object files properties not present
7094 otherwise.
7095
7096 @cindex Cortex-A8 erratum workaround
7097 @kindex --fix-cortex-a8
7098 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a8
7099 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a8} switch enables a link-time workaround for an erratum in certain Cortex-A8 processors. The workaround is enabled by default if you are targeting the ARM v7-A architecture profile. It can be enabled otherwise by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a8}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a8}.
7100
7101 The erratum only affects Thumb-2 code. Please contact ARM for further details.
7102
7103 @cindex Cortex-A53 erratum 835769 workaround
7104 @kindex --fix-cortex-a53-835769
7105 @kindex --no-fix-cortex-a53-835769
7106 The @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769} switch enables a link-time workaround for erratum 835769 present on certain early revisions of Cortex-A53 processors. The workaround is disabled by default. It can be enabled by specifying @samp{--fix-cortex-a53-835769}, or disabled unconditionally by specifying @samp{--no-fix-cortex-a53-835769}.
7107
7108 Please contact ARM for further details.
7109
7110 @kindex --merge-exidx-entries
7111 @kindex --no-merge-exidx-entries
7112 @cindex Merging exidx entries
7113 The @samp{--no-merge-exidx-entries} switch disables the merging of adjacent exidx entries in debuginfo.
7114
7115 @kindex --long-plt
7116 @cindex 32-bit PLT entries
7117 The @samp{--long-plt} option enables the use of 16 byte PLT entries
7118 which support up to 4Gb of code. The default is to use 12 byte PLT
7119 entries which only support 512Mb of code.
7120
7121 @kindex --no-apply-dynamic-relocs
7122 @cindex AArch64 rela addend
7123 The @samp{--no-apply-dynamic-relocs} option makes AArch64 linker do not apply
7124 link-time values for dynamic relocations.
7125
7126 @cindex Placement of SG veneers
7127 All SG veneers are placed in the special output section @code{.gnu.sgstubs}.
7128 Its start address must be set, either with the command-line option
7129 @samp{--section-start} or in a linker script, to indicate where to place these
7130 veneers in memory.
7131
7132 @kindex --cmse-implib
7133 @cindex Secure gateway import library
7134 The @samp{--cmse-implib} option requests that the import libraries
7135 specified by the @samp{--out-implib} and @samp{--in-implib} options are
7136 secure gateway import libraries, suitable for linking a non-secure
7137 executable against secure code as per ARMv8-M Security Extensions.
7138
7139 @kindex --in-implib=@var{file}
7140 @cindex Input import library
7141 The @samp{--in-implib=file} specifies an input import library whose symbols
7142 must keep the same address in the executable being produced. A warning is
7143 given if no @samp{--out-implib} is given but new symbols have been introduced
7144 in the executable that should be listed in its import library. Otherwise, if
7145 @samp{--out-implib} is specified, the symbols are added to the output import
7146 library. A warning is also given if some symbols present in the input import
7147 library have disappeared from the executable. This option is only effective
7148 for Secure Gateway import libraries, ie. when @samp{--cmse-implib} is
7149 specified.
7150
7151 @ifclear GENERIC
7152 @lowersections
7153 @end ifclear
7154 @end ifset
7155
7156 @ifset HPPA
7157 @ifclear GENERIC
7158 @raisesections
7159 @end ifclear
7160
7161 @node HPPA ELF32
7162 @section @command{ld} and HPPA 32-bit ELF Support
7163 @cindex HPPA multiple sub-space stubs
7164 @kindex --multi-subspace
7165 When generating a shared library, @command{ld} will by default generate
7166 import stubs suitable for use with a single sub-space application.
7167 The @samp{--multi-subspace} switch causes @command{ld} to generate export
7168 stubs, and different (larger) import stubs suitable for use with
7169 multiple sub-spaces.
7170
7171 @cindex HPPA stub grouping
7172 @kindex --stub-group-size=@var{N}
7173 Long branch stubs and import/export stubs are placed by @command{ld} in
7174 stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7175 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7176 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7177 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7178 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7179 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7180 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7181 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7182 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7183 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7184 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7185 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7186 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7187
7188 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7189 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7190 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7191 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7192
7193 @ifclear GENERIC
7194 @lowersections
7195 @end ifclear
7196 @end ifset
7197
7198 @ifset M68K
7199 @ifclear GENERIC
7200 @raisesections
7201 @end ifclear
7202
7203 @node M68K
7204 @section @command{ld} and the Motorola 68K family
7205
7206 @cindex Motorola 68K GOT generation
7207 @kindex --got=@var{type}
7208 The @samp{--got=@var{type}} option lets you choose the GOT generation scheme.
7209 The choices are @samp{single}, @samp{negative}, @samp{multigot} and
7210 @samp{target}. When @samp{target} is selected the linker chooses
7211 the default GOT generation scheme for the current target.
7212 @samp{single} tells the linker to generate a single GOT with
7213 entries only at non-negative offsets.
7214 @samp{negative} instructs the linker to generate a single GOT with
7215 entries at both negative and positive offsets. Not all environments
7216 support such GOTs.
7217 @samp{multigot} allows the linker to generate several GOTs in the
7218 output file. All GOT references from a single input object
7219 file access the same GOT, but references from different input object
7220 files might access different GOTs. Not all environments support such GOTs.
7221
7222 @ifclear GENERIC
7223 @lowersections
7224 @end ifclear
7225 @end ifset
7226
7227 @ifset MIPS
7228 @ifclear GENERIC
7229 @raisesections
7230 @end ifclear
7231
7232 @node MIPS
7233 @section @command{ld} and the MIPS family
7234
7235 @cindex MIPS microMIPS instruction choice selection
7236 @kindex --insn32
7237 @kindex --no-insn32
7238 The @samp{--insn32} and @samp{--no-insn32} options control the choice of
7239 microMIPS instructions used in code generated by the linker, such as that
7240 in the PLT or lazy binding stubs, or in relaxation. If @samp{--insn32} is
7241 used, then the linker only uses 32-bit instruction encodings. By default
7242 or if @samp{--no-insn32} is used, all instruction encodings are used,
7243 including 16-bit ones where possible.
7244
7245 @cindex MIPS branch relocation check control
7246 @kindex --ignore-branch-isa
7247 @kindex --no-ignore-branch-isa
7248 The @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} and @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} options
7249 control branch relocation checks for invalid ISA mode transitions. If
7250 @samp{--ignore-branch-isa} is used, then the linker accepts any branch
7251 relocations and any ISA mode transition required is lost in relocation
7252 calculation, except for some cases of @code{BAL} instructions which meet
7253 relaxation conditions and are converted to equivalent @code{JALX}
7254 instructions as the associated relocation is calculated. By default
7255 or if @samp{--no-ignore-branch-isa} is used a check is made causing
7256 the loss of an ISA mode transition to produce an error.
7257
7258 @ifclear GENERIC
7259 @lowersections
7260 @end ifclear
7261 @end ifset
7262
7263 @ifset MMIX
7264 @ifclear GENERIC
7265 @raisesections
7266 @end ifclear
7267
7268 @node MMIX
7269 @section @code{ld} and MMIX
7270 For MMIX, there is a choice of generating @code{ELF} object files or
7271 @code{mmo} object files when linking. The simulator @code{mmix}
7272 understands the @code{mmo} format. The binutils @code{objcopy} utility
7273 can translate between the two formats.
7274
7275 There is one special section, the @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section.
7276 Contents in this section is assumed to correspond to that of global
7277 registers, and symbols referring to it are translated to special symbols,
7278 equal to registers. In a final link, the start address of the
7279 @samp{.MMIX.reg_contents} section corresponds to the first allocated
7280 global register multiplied by 8. Register @code{$255} is not included in
7281 this section; it is always set to the program entry, which is at the
7282 symbol @code{Main} for @code{mmo} files.
7283
7284 Global symbols with the prefix @code{__.MMIX.start.}, for example
7285 @code{__.MMIX.start..text} and @code{__.MMIX.start..data} are special.
7286 The default linker script uses these to set the default start address
7287 of a section.
7288
7289 Initial and trailing multiples of zero-valued 32-bit words in a section,
7290 are left out from an mmo file.
7291
7292 @ifclear GENERIC
7293 @lowersections
7294 @end ifclear
7295 @end ifset
7296
7297 @ifset MSP430
7298 @ifclear GENERIC
7299 @raisesections
7300 @end ifclear
7301
7302 @node MSP430
7303 @section @code{ld} and MSP430
7304 For the MSP430 it is possible to select the MPU architecture. The flag @samp{-m [mpu type]}
7305 will select an appropriate linker script for selected MPU type. (To get a list of known MPUs
7306 just pass @samp{-m help} option to the linker).
7307
7308 @cindex MSP430 extra sections
7309 The linker will recognize some extra sections which are MSP430 specific:
7310
7311 @table @code
7312 @item @samp{.vectors}
7313 Defines a portion of ROM where interrupt vectors located.
7314
7315 @item @samp{.bootloader}
7316 Defines the bootloader portion of the ROM (if applicable). Any code
7317 in this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7318
7319 @item @samp{.infomem}
7320 Defines an information memory section (if applicable). Any code in
7321 this section will be uploaded to the MPU.
7322
7323 @item @samp{.infomemnobits}
7324 This is the same as the @samp{.infomem} section except that any code
7325 in this section will not be uploaded to the MPU.
7326
7327 @item @samp{.noinit}
7328 Denotes a portion of RAM located above @samp{.bss} section.
7329
7330 The last two sections are used by gcc.
7331 @end table
7332
7333 @table @option
7334 @cindex MSP430 Options
7335 @kindex --code-region
7336 @item --code-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7337 This will transform .text* sections to [either,lower,upper].text* sections. The
7338 argument passed to GCC for -mcode-region is propagated to the linker
7339 using this option.
7340
7341 @kindex --data-region
7342 @item --data-region=[either,lower,upper,none]
7343 This will transform .data*, .bss* and .rodata* sections to
7344 [either,lower,upper].[data,bss,rodata]* sections. The argument passed to GCC
7345 for -mdata-region is propagated to the linker using this option.
7346
7347 @kindex --disable-sec-transformation
7348 @item --disable-sec-transformation
7349 Prevent the transformation of sections as specified by the @code{--code-region}
7350 and @code{--data-region} options.
7351 This is useful if you are compiling and linking using a single call to the GCC
7352 wrapper, and want to compile the source files using -m[code,data]-region but
7353 not transform the sections for prebuilt libraries and objects.
7354 @end table
7355
7356 @ifclear GENERIC
7357 @lowersections
7358 @end ifclear
7359 @end ifset
7360
7361 @ifset NDS32
7362 @ifclear GENERIC
7363 @raisesections
7364 @end ifclear
7365
7366 @node NDS32
7367 @section @code{ld} and NDS32
7368 @kindex relaxing on NDS32
7369 For NDS32, there are some options to select relaxation behavior. The linker
7370 relaxes objects according to these options.
7371
7372 @table @code
7373 @item @samp{--m[no-]fp-as-gp}
7374 Disable/enable fp-as-gp relaxation.
7375
7376 @item @samp{--mexport-symbols=FILE}
7377 Exporting symbols and their address into FILE as linker script.
7378
7379 @item @samp{--m[no-]ex9}
7380 Disable/enable link-time EX9 relaxation.
7381
7382 @item @samp{--mexport-ex9=FILE}
7383 Export the EX9 table after linking.
7384
7385 @item @samp{--mimport-ex9=FILE}
7386 Import the Ex9 table for EX9 relaxation.
7387
7388 @item @samp{--mupdate-ex9}
7389 Update the existing EX9 table.
7390
7391 @item @samp{--mex9-limit=NUM}
7392 Maximum number of entries in the ex9 table.
7393
7394 @item @samp{--mex9-loop-aware}
7395 Avoid generating the EX9 instruction inside the loop.
7396
7397 @item @samp{--m[no-]ifc}
7398 Disable/enable the link-time IFC optimization.
7399
7400 @item @samp{--mifc-loop-aware}
7401 Avoid generating the IFC instruction inside the loop.
7402 @end table
7403
7404 @ifclear GENERIC
7405 @lowersections
7406 @end ifclear
7407 @end ifset
7408
7409 @ifset NIOSII
7410 @ifclear GENERIC
7411 @raisesections
7412 @end ifclear
7413
7414 @node Nios II
7415 @section @command{ld} and the Altera Nios II
7416 @cindex Nios II call relaxation
7417 @kindex --relax on Nios II
7418
7419 Call and immediate jump instructions on Nios II processors are limited to
7420 transferring control to addresses in the same 256MB memory segment,
7421 which may result in @command{ld} giving
7422 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7423 The command-line option @option{--relax} enables the generation of
7424 trampolines that can access the entire 32-bit address space for calls
7425 outside the normal @code{call} and @code{jmpi} address range. These
7426 trampolines are inserted at section boundaries, so may not themselves
7427 be reachable if an input section and its associated call trampolines are
7428 larger than 256MB.
7429
7430 The @option{--relax} option is enabled by default unless @option{-r}
7431 is also specified. You can disable trampoline generation by using the
7432 @option{--no-relax} linker option. You can also disable this optimization
7433 locally by using the @samp{set .noat} directive in assembly-language
7434 source files, as the linker-inserted trampolines use the @code{at}
7435 register as a temporary.
7436
7437 Note that the linker @option{--relax} option is independent of assembler
7438 relaxation options, and that using the GNU assembler's @option{-relax-all}
7439 option interferes with the linker's more selective call instruction relaxation.
7440
7441 @ifclear GENERIC
7442 @lowersections
7443 @end ifclear
7444 @end ifset
7445
7446 @ifset POWERPC
7447 @ifclear GENERIC
7448 @raisesections
7449 @end ifclear
7450
7451 @node PowerPC ELF32
7452 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC 32-bit ELF Support
7453 @cindex PowerPC long branches
7454 @kindex --relax on PowerPC
7455 Branches on PowerPC processors are limited to a signed 26-bit
7456 displacement, which may result in @command{ld} giving
7457 @samp{relocation truncated to fit} errors with very large programs.
7458 @samp{--relax} enables the generation of trampolines that can access
7459 the entire 32-bit address space. These trampolines are inserted at
7460 section boundaries, so may not themselves be reachable if an input
7461 section exceeds 33M in size. You may combine @samp{-r} and
7462 @samp{--relax} to add trampolines in a partial link. In that case
7463 both branches to undefined symbols and inter-section branches are also
7464 considered potentially out of range, and trampolines inserted.
7465
7466 @cindex PowerPC ELF32 options
7467 @table @option
7468 @cindex PowerPC PLT
7469 @kindex --bss-plt
7470 @item --bss-plt
7471 Current PowerPC GCC accepts a @samp{-msecure-plt} option that
7472 generates code capable of using a newer PLT and GOT layout that has
7473 the security advantage of no executable section ever needing to be
7474 writable and no writable section ever being executable. PowerPC
7475 @command{ld} will generate this layout, including stubs to access the
7476 PLT, if all input files (including startup and static libraries) were
7477 compiled with @samp{-msecure-plt}. @samp{--bss-plt} forces the old
7478 BSS PLT (and GOT layout) which can give slightly better performance.
7479
7480 @kindex --secure-plt
7481 @item --secure-plt
7482 @command{ld} will use the new PLT and GOT layout if it is linking new
7483 @samp{-fpic} or @samp{-fPIC} code, but does not do so automatically
7484 when linking non-PIC code. This option requests the new PLT and GOT
7485 layout. A warning will be given if some object file requires the old
7486 style BSS PLT.
7487
7488 @cindex PowerPC GOT
7489 @kindex --sdata-got
7490 @item --sdata-got
7491 The new secure PLT and GOT are placed differently relative to other
7492 sections compared to older BSS PLT and GOT placement. The location of
7493 @code{.plt} must change because the new secure PLT is an initialized
7494 section while the old PLT is uninitialized. The reason for the
7495 @code{.got} change is more subtle: The new placement allows
7496 @code{.got} to be read-only in applications linked with
7497 @samp{-z relro -z now}. However, this placement means that
7498 @code{.sdata} cannot always be used in shared libraries, because the
7499 PowerPC ABI accesses @code{.sdata} in shared libraries from the GOT
7500 pointer. @samp{--sdata-got} forces the old GOT placement. PowerPC
7501 GCC doesn't use @code{.sdata} in shared libraries, so this option is
7502 really only useful for other compilers that may do so.
7503
7504 @cindex PowerPC stub symbols
7505 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7506 @item --emit-stub-syms
7507 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7508 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7509
7510 @cindex PowerPC TLS optimization
7511 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7512 @item --no-tls-optimize
7513 PowerPC @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7514 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7515 disable the optimization.
7516 @end table
7517
7518 @ifclear GENERIC
7519 @lowersections
7520 @end ifclear
7521 @end ifset
7522
7523 @ifset POWERPC64
7524 @ifclear GENERIC
7525 @raisesections
7526 @end ifclear
7527
7528 @node PowerPC64 ELF64
7529 @section @command{ld} and PowerPC64 64-bit ELF Support
7530
7531 @cindex PowerPC64 ELF64 options
7532 @table @option
7533 @cindex PowerPC64 stub grouping
7534 @kindex --stub-group-size
7535 @item --stub-group-size
7536 Long branch stubs, PLT call stubs and TOC adjusting stubs are placed
7537 by @command{ld} in stub sections located between groups of input sections.
7538 @samp{--stub-group-size} specifies the maximum size of a group of input
7539 sections handled by one stub section. Since branch offsets are signed,
7540 a stub section may serve two groups of input sections, one group before
7541 the stub section, and one group after it. However, when using
7542 conditional branches that require stubs, it may be better (for branch
7543 prediction) that stub sections only serve one group of input sections.
7544 A negative value for @samp{N} chooses this scheme, ensuring that
7545 branches to stubs always use a negative offset. Two special values of
7546 @samp{N} are recognized, @samp{1} and @samp{-1}. These both instruct
7547 @command{ld} to automatically size input section groups for the branch types
7548 detected, with the same behaviour regarding stub placement as other
7549 positive or negative values of @samp{N} respectively.
7550
7551 Note that @samp{--stub-group-size} does not split input sections. A
7552 single input section larger than the group size specified will of course
7553 create a larger group (of one section). If input sections are too
7554 large, it may not be possible for a branch to reach its stub.
7555
7556 @cindex PowerPC64 stub symbols
7557 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7558 @item --emit-stub-syms
7559 This option causes @command{ld} to label linker stubs with a local
7560 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7561
7562 @cindex PowerPC64 dot symbols
7563 @kindex --dotsyms
7564 @kindex --no-dotsyms
7565 @item --dotsyms
7566 @itemx --no-dotsyms
7567 These two options control how @command{ld} interprets version patterns
7568 in a version script. Older PowerPC64 compilers emitted both a
7569 function descriptor symbol with the same name as the function, and a
7570 code entry symbol with the name prefixed by a dot (@samp{.}). To
7571 properly version a function @samp{foo}, the version script thus needs
7572 to control both @samp{foo} and @samp{.foo}. The option
7573 @samp{--dotsyms}, on by default, automatically adds the required
7574 dot-prefixed patterns. Use @samp{--no-dotsyms} to disable this
7575 feature.
7576
7577 @cindex PowerPC64 register save/restore functions
7578 @kindex --save-restore-funcs
7579 @kindex --no-save-restore-funcs
7580 @item --save-restore-funcs
7581 @itemx --no-save-restore-funcs
7582 These two options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} automatically
7583 provides out-of-line register save and restore functions used by
7584 @samp{-Os} code. The default is to provide any such referenced
7585 function for a normal final link, and to not do so for a relocatable
7586 link.
7587
7588 @cindex PowerPC64 TLS optimization
7589 @kindex --no-tls-optimize
7590 @item --no-tls-optimize
7591 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally performs some optimization of code
7592 sequences used to access Thread-Local Storage. Use this option to
7593 disable the optimization.
7594
7595 @cindex PowerPC64 __tls_get_addr optimization
7596 @kindex --tls-get-addr-optimize
7597 @kindex --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7598 @item --tls-get-addr-optimize
7599 @itemx --no-tls-get-addr-optimize
7600 These options control whether PowerPC64 @command{ld} uses a special
7601 stub to call __tls_get_addr. PowerPC64 glibc 2.22 and later support
7602 an optimization that allows the second and subsequent calls to
7603 @code{__tls_get_addr} for a given symbol to be resolved by the special
7604 stub without calling in to glibc. By default the linker enables this
7605 option when glibc advertises the availability of __tls_get_addr_opt.
7606 Forcing this option on when using an older glibc won't do much besides
7607 slow down your applications, but may be useful if linking an
7608 application against an older glibc with the expectation that it will
7609 normally be used on systems having a newer glibc.
7610
7611 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD optimization
7612 @kindex --no-opd-optimize
7613 @item --no-opd-optimize
7614 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes @code{.opd} section entries
7615 corresponding to deleted link-once functions, or functions removed by
7616 the action of @samp{--gc-sections} or linker script @code{/DISCARD/}.
7617 Use this option to disable @code{.opd} optimization.
7618
7619 @cindex PowerPC64 OPD spacing
7620 @kindex --non-overlapping-opd
7621 @item --non-overlapping-opd
7622 Some PowerPC64 compilers have an option to generate compressed
7623 @code{.opd} entries spaced 16 bytes apart, overlapping the third word,
7624 the static chain pointer (unused in C) with the first word of the next
7625 entry. This option expands such entries to the full 24 bytes.
7626
7627 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC optimization
7628 @kindex --no-toc-optimize
7629 @item --no-toc-optimize
7630 PowerPC64 @command{ld} normally removes unused @code{.toc} section
7631 entries. Such entries are detected by examining relocations that
7632 reference the TOC in code sections. A reloc in a deleted code section
7633 marks a TOC word as unneeded, while a reloc in a kept code section
7634 marks a TOC word as needed. Since the TOC may reference itself, TOC
7635 relocs are also examined. TOC words marked as both needed and
7636 unneeded will of course be kept. TOC words without any referencing
7637 reloc are assumed to be part of a multi-word entry, and are kept or
7638 discarded as per the nearest marked preceding word. This works
7639 reliably for compiler generated code, but may be incorrect if assembly
7640 code is used to insert TOC entries. Use this option to disable the
7641 optimization.
7642
7643 @cindex PowerPC64 multi-TOC
7644 @kindex --no-multi-toc
7645 @item --no-multi-toc
7646 If given any toc option besides @code{-mcmodel=medium} or
7647 @code{-mcmodel=large}, PowerPC64 GCC generates code for a TOC model
7648 where TOC
7649 entries are accessed with a 16-bit offset from r2. This limits the
7650 total TOC size to 64K. PowerPC64 @command{ld} extends this limit by
7651 grouping code sections such that each group uses less than 64K for its
7652 TOC entries, then inserts r2 adjusting stubs between inter-group
7653 calls. @command{ld} does not split apart input sections, so cannot
7654 help if a single input file has a @code{.toc} section that exceeds
7655 64K, most likely from linking multiple files with @command{ld -r}.
7656 Use this option to turn off this feature.
7657
7658 @cindex PowerPC64 TOC sorting
7659 @kindex --no-toc-sort
7660 @item --no-toc-sort
7661 By default, @command{ld} sorts TOC sections so that those whose file
7662 happens to have a section called @code{.init} or @code{.fini} are
7663 placed first, followed by TOC sections referenced by code generated
7664 with PowerPC64 gcc's @code{-mcmodel=small}, and lastly TOC sections
7665 referenced only by code generated with PowerPC64 gcc's
7666 @code{-mcmodel=medium} or @code{-mcmodel=large} options. Doing this
7667 results in better TOC grouping for multi-TOC. Use this option to turn
7668 off this feature.
7669
7670 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT stub alignment
7671 @kindex --plt-align
7672 @kindex --no-plt-align
7673 @item --plt-align
7674 @itemx --no-plt-align
7675 Use these options to control whether individual PLT call stubs are
7676 aligned to a 32-byte boundary, or to the specified power of two
7677 boundary when using @code{--plt-align=}. A negative value may be
7678 specified to pad PLT call stubs so that they do not cross the
7679 specified power of two boundary (or the minimum number of boundaries
7680 if a PLT stub is so large that it must cross a boundary). By default
7681 PLT call stubs are aligned to 32-byte boundaries.
7682
7683 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub static chain
7684 @kindex --plt-static-chain
7685 @kindex --no-plt-static-chain
7686 @item --plt-static-chain
7687 @itemx --no-plt-static-chain
7688 Use these options to control whether PLT call stubs load the static
7689 chain pointer (r11). @code{ld} defaults to not loading the static
7690 chain since there is never any need to do so on a PLT call.
7691
7692 @cindex PowerPC64 PLT call stub thread safety
7693 @kindex --plt-thread-safe
7694 @kindex --no-plt-thread-safe
7695 @item --plt-thread-safe
7696 @itemx --no-plt-thread-safe
7697 With power7's weakly ordered memory model, it is possible when using
7698 lazy binding for ld.so to update a plt entry in one thread and have
7699 another thread see the individual plt entry words update in the wrong
7700 order, despite ld.so carefully writing in the correct order and using
7701 memory write barriers. To avoid this we need some sort of read
7702 barrier in the call stub, or use LD_BIND_NOW=1. By default, @code{ld}
7703 looks for calls to commonly used functions that create threads, and if
7704 seen, adds the necessary barriers. Use these options to change the
7705 default behaviour.
7706
7707 @cindex PowerPC64 ELFv2 PLT localentry optimization
7708 @kindex --plt-localentry
7709 @kindex --no-plt-localentry
7710 @item --plt-localentry
7711 @itemx --no-localentry
7712 ELFv2 functions with localentry:0 are those with a single entry point,
7713 ie. global entry == local entry, and that have no requirement on r2
7714 (the TOC/GOT pointer) or r12, and guarantee r2 is unchanged on return.
7715 Such an external function can be called via the PLT without saving r2
7716 or restoring it on return, avoiding a common load-hit-store for small
7717 functions. The optimization is attractive, with up to 40% reduction
7718 in execution time for a small function, but can result in symbol
7719 interposition failures. Also, minor changes in a shared library,
7720 including system libraries, can cause a function that was localentry:0
7721 to become localentry:8. This will result in a dynamic loader
7722 complaint and failure to run. The option is experimental, use with
7723 care. @option{--no-plt-localentry} is the default.
7724 @end table
7725
7726 @ifclear GENERIC
7727 @lowersections
7728 @end ifclear
7729 @end ifset
7730
7731 @ifset S/390
7732 @ifclear GENERIC
7733 @raisesections
7734 @end ifclear
7735
7736 @node S/390 ELF
7737 @section @command{ld} and S/390 ELF Support
7738
7739 @cindex S/390 ELF options
7740 @table @option
7741
7742 @cindex S/390
7743 @kindex --s390-pgste
7744 @item --s390-pgste
7745 This option marks the result file with a @code{PT_S390_PGSTE}
7746 segment. The Linux kernel is supposed to allocate 4k page tables for
7747 binaries marked that way.
7748 @end table
7749
7750 @ifclear GENERIC
7751 @lowersections
7752 @end ifclear
7753 @end ifset
7754
7755 @ifset SPU
7756 @ifclear GENERIC
7757 @raisesections
7758 @end ifclear
7759
7760 @node SPU ELF
7761 @section @command{ld} and SPU ELF Support
7762
7763 @cindex SPU ELF options
7764 @table @option
7765
7766 @cindex SPU plugins
7767 @kindex --plugin
7768 @item --plugin
7769 This option marks an executable as a PIC plugin module.
7770
7771 @cindex SPU overlays
7772 @kindex --no-overlays
7773 @item --no-overlays
7774 Normally, @command{ld} recognizes calls to functions within overlay
7775 regions, and redirects such calls to an overlay manager via a stub.
7776 @command{ld} also provides a built-in overlay manager. This option
7777 turns off all this special overlay handling.
7778
7779 @cindex SPU overlay stub symbols
7780 @kindex --emit-stub-syms
7781 @item --emit-stub-syms
7782 This option causes @command{ld} to label overlay stubs with a local
7783 symbol that encodes the stub type and destination.
7784
7785 @cindex SPU extra overlay stubs
7786 @kindex --extra-overlay-stubs
7787 @item --extra-overlay-stubs
7788 This option causes @command{ld} to add overlay call stubs on all
7789 function calls out of overlay regions. Normally stubs are not added
7790 on calls to non-overlay regions.
7791
7792 @cindex SPU local store size
7793 @kindex --local-store=lo:hi
7794 @item --local-store=lo:hi
7795 @command{ld} usually checks that a final executable for SPU fits in
7796 the address range 0 to 256k. This option may be used to change the
7797 range. Disable the check entirely with @option{--local-store=0:0}.
7798
7799 @cindex SPU
7800 @kindex --stack-analysis
7801 @item --stack-analysis
7802 SPU local store space is limited. Over-allocation of stack space
7803 unnecessarily limits space available for code and data, while
7804 under-allocation results in runtime failures. If given this option,
7805 @command{ld} will provide an estimate of maximum stack usage.
7806 @command{ld} does this by examining symbols in code sections to
7807 determine the extents of functions, and looking at function prologues
7808 for stack adjusting instructions. A call-graph is created by looking
7809 for relocations on branch instructions. The graph is then searched
7810 for the maximum stack usage path. Note that this analysis does not
7811 find calls made via function pointers, and does not handle recursion
7812 and other cycles in the call graph. Stack usage may be
7813 under-estimated if your code makes such calls. Also, stack usage for
7814 dynamic allocation, e.g. alloca, will not be detected. If a link map
7815 is requested, detailed information about each function's stack usage
7816 and calls will be given.
7817
7818 @cindex SPU
7819 @kindex --emit-stack-syms
7820 @item --emit-stack-syms
7821 This option, if given along with @option{--stack-analysis} will result
7822 in @command{ld} emitting stack sizing symbols for each function.
7823 These take the form @code{__stack_<function_name>} for global
7824 functions, and @code{__stack_<number>_<function_name>} for static
7825 functions. @code{<number>} is the section id in hex. The value of
7826 such symbols is the stack requirement for the corresponding function.
7827 The symbol size will be zero, type @code{STT_NOTYPE}, binding
7828 @code{STB_LOCAL}, and section @code{SHN_ABS}.
7829 @end table
7830
7831 @ifclear GENERIC
7832 @lowersections
7833 @end ifclear
7834 @end ifset
7835
7836 @ifset TICOFF
7837 @ifclear GENERIC
7838 @raisesections
7839 @end ifclear
7840
7841 @node TI COFF
7842 @section @command{ld}'s Support for Various TI COFF Versions
7843 @cindex TI COFF versions
7844 @kindex --format=@var{version}
7845 The @samp{--format} switch allows selection of one of the various
7846 TI COFF versions. The latest of this writing is 2; versions 0 and 1 are
7847 also supported. The TI COFF versions also vary in header byte-order
7848 format; @command{ld} will read any version or byte order, but the output
7849 header format depends on the default specified by the specific target.
7850
7851 @ifclear GENERIC
7852 @lowersections
7853 @end ifclear
7854 @end ifset
7855
7856 @ifset WIN32
7857 @ifclear GENERIC
7858 @raisesections
7859 @end ifclear
7860
7861 @node WIN32
7862 @section @command{ld} and WIN32 (cygwin/mingw)
7863
7864 This section describes some of the win32 specific @command{ld} issues.
7865 See @ref{Options,,Command-line Options} for detailed description of the
7866 command-line options mentioned here.
7867
7868 @table @emph
7869 @cindex import libraries
7870 @item import libraries
7871 The standard Windows linker creates and uses so-called import
7872 libraries, which contains information for linking to dll's. They are
7873 regular static archives and are handled as any other static
7874 archive. The cygwin and mingw ports of @command{ld} have specific
7875 support for creating such libraries provided with the
7876 @samp{--out-implib} command-line option.
7877
7878 @item exporting DLL symbols
7879 @cindex exporting DLL symbols
7880 The cygwin/mingw @command{ld} has several ways to export symbols for dll's.
7881
7882 @table @emph
7883 @item using auto-export functionality
7884 @cindex using auto-export functionality
7885 By default @command{ld} exports symbols with the auto-export functionality,
7886 which is controlled by the following command-line options:
7887
7888 @itemize
7889 @item --export-all-symbols [This is the default]
7890 @item --exclude-symbols
7891 @item --exclude-libs
7892 @item --exclude-modules-for-implib
7893 @item --version-script
7894 @end itemize
7895
7896 When auto-export is in operation, @command{ld} will export all the non-local
7897 (global and common) symbols it finds in a DLL, with the exception of a few
7898 symbols known to belong to the system's runtime and libraries. As it will
7899 often not be desirable to export all of a DLL's symbols, which may include
7900 private functions that are not part of any public interface, the command-line
7901 options listed above may be used to filter symbols out from the list for
7902 exporting. The @samp{--output-def} option can be used in order to see the
7903 final list of exported symbols with all exclusions taken into effect.
7904
7905 If @samp{--export-all-symbols} is not given explicitly on the
7906 command line, then the default auto-export behavior will be @emph{disabled}
7907 if either of the following are true:
7908
7909 @itemize
7910 @item A DEF file is used.
7911 @item Any symbol in any object file was marked with the __declspec(dllexport) attribute.
7912 @end itemize
7913
7914 @item using a DEF file
7915 @cindex using a DEF file
7916 Another way of exporting symbols is using a DEF file. A DEF file is
7917 an ASCII file containing definitions of symbols which should be
7918 exported when a dll is created. Usually it is named @samp{<dll
7919 name>.def} and is added as any other object file to the linker's
7920 command line. The file's name must end in @samp{.def} or @samp{.DEF}.
7921
7922 @example
7923 gcc -o <output> <objectfiles> <dll name>.def
7924 @end example
7925
7926 Using a DEF file turns off the normal auto-export behavior, unless the
7927 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
7928
7929 Here is an example of a DEF file for a shared library called @samp{xyz.dll}:
7930
7931 @example
7932 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x20000000
7933
7934 EXPORTS
7935 foo
7936 bar
7937 _bar = bar
7938 another_foo = abc.dll.afoo
7939 var1 DATA
7940 doo = foo == foo2
7941 eoo DATA == var1
7942 @end example
7943
7944 This example defines a DLL with a non-default base address and seven
7945 symbols in the export table. The third exported symbol @code{_bar} is an
7946 alias for the second. The fourth symbol, @code{another_foo} is resolved
7947 by "forwarding" to another module and treating it as an alias for
7948 @code{afoo} exported from the DLL @samp{abc.dll}. The final symbol
7949 @code{var1} is declared to be a data object. The @samp{doo} symbol in
7950 export library is an alias of @samp{foo}, which gets the string name
7951 in export table @samp{foo2}. The @samp{eoo} symbol is an data export
7952 symbol, which gets in export table the name @samp{var1}.
7953
7954 The optional @code{LIBRARY <name>} command indicates the @emph{internal}
7955 name of the output DLL. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix,
7956 the default library suffix, @samp{.DLL} is appended.
7957
7958 When the .DEF file is used to build an application, rather than a
7959 library, the @code{NAME <name>} command should be used instead of
7960 @code{LIBRARY}. If @samp{<name>} does not include a suffix, the default
7961 executable suffix, @samp{.EXE} is appended.
7962
7963 With either @code{LIBRARY <name>} or @code{NAME <name>} the optional
7964 specification @code{BASE = <number>} may be used to specify a
7965 non-default base address for the image.
7966
7967 If neither @code{LIBRARY <name>} nor @code{NAME <name>} is specified,
7968 or they specify an empty string, the internal name is the same as the
7969 filename specified on the command line.
7970
7971 The complete specification of an export symbol is:
7972
7973 @example
7974 EXPORTS
7975 ( ( ( <name1> [ = <name2> ] )
7976 | ( <name1> = <module-name> . <external-name>))
7977 [ @@ <integer> ] [NONAME] [DATA] [CONSTANT] [PRIVATE] [== <name3>] ) *
7978 @end example
7979
7980 Declares @samp{<name1>} as an exported symbol from the DLL, or declares
7981 @samp{<name1>} as an exported alias for @samp{<name2>}; or declares
7982 @samp{<name1>} as a "forward" alias for the symbol
7983 @samp{<external-name>} in the DLL @samp{<module-name>}.
7984 Optionally, the symbol may be exported by the specified ordinal
7985 @samp{<integer>} alias. The optional @samp{<name3>} is the to be used
7986 string in import/export table for the symbol.
7987
7988 The optional keywords that follow the declaration indicate:
7989
7990 @code{NONAME}: Do not put the symbol name in the DLL's export table. It
7991 will still be exported by its ordinal alias (either the value specified
7992 by the .def specification or, otherwise, the value assigned by the
7993 linker). The symbol name, however, does remain visible in the import
7994 library (if any), unless @code{PRIVATE} is also specified.
7995
7996 @code{DATA}: The symbol is a variable or object, rather than a function.
7997 The import lib will export only an indirect reference to @code{foo} as
7998 the symbol @code{_imp__foo} (ie, @code{foo} must be resolved as
7999 @code{*_imp__foo}).
8000
8001 @code{CONSTANT}: Like @code{DATA}, but put the undecorated @code{foo} as
8002 well as @code{_imp__foo} into the import library. Both refer to the
8003 read-only import address table's pointer to the variable, not to the
8004 variable itself. This can be dangerous. If the user code fails to add
8005 the @code{dllimport} attribute and also fails to explicitly add the
8006 extra indirection that the use of the attribute enforces, the
8007 application will behave unexpectedly.
8008
8009 @code{PRIVATE}: Put the symbol in the DLL's export table, but do not put
8010 it into the static import library used to resolve imports at link time. The
8011 symbol can still be imported using the @code{LoadLibrary/GetProcAddress}
8012 API at runtime or by using the GNU ld extension of linking directly to
8013 the DLL without an import library.
8014
8015 See ld/deffilep.y in the binutils sources for the full specification of
8016 other DEF file statements
8017
8018 @cindex creating a DEF file
8019 While linking a shared dll, @command{ld} is able to create a DEF file
8020 with the @samp{--output-def <file>} command-line option.
8021
8022 @item Using decorations
8023 @cindex Using decorations
8024 Another way of marking symbols for export is to modify the source code
8025 itself, so that when building the DLL each symbol to be exported is
8026 declared as:
8027
8028 @example
8029 __declspec(dllexport) int a_variable
8030 __declspec(dllexport) void a_function(int with_args)
8031 @end example
8032
8033 All such symbols will be exported from the DLL. If, however,
8034 any of the object files in the DLL contain symbols decorated in
8035 this way, then the normal auto-export behavior is disabled, unless
8036 the @samp{--export-all-symbols} option is also used.
8037
8038 Note that object files that wish to access these symbols must @emph{not}
8039 decorate them with dllexport. Instead, they should use dllimport,
8040 instead:
8041
8042 @example
8043 __declspec(dllimport) int a_variable
8044 __declspec(dllimport) void a_function(int with_args)
8045 @end example
8046
8047 This complicates the structure of library header files, because
8048 when included by the library itself the header must declare the
8049 variables and functions as dllexport, but when included by client
8050 code the header must declare them as dllimport. There are a number
8051 of idioms that are typically used to do this; often client code can
8052 omit the __declspec() declaration completely. See
8053 @samp{--enable-auto-import} and @samp{automatic data imports} for more
8054 information.
8055 @end table
8056
8057 @cindex automatic data imports
8058 @item automatic data imports
8059 The standard Windows dll format supports data imports from dlls only
8060 by adding special decorations (dllimport/dllexport), which let the
8061 compiler produce specific assembler instructions to deal with this
8062 issue. This increases the effort necessary to port existing Un*x
8063 code to these platforms, especially for large
8064 c++ libraries and applications. The auto-import feature, which was
8065 initially provided by Paul Sokolovsky, allows one to omit the
8066 decorations to achieve a behavior that conforms to that on POSIX/Un*x
8067 platforms. This feature is enabled with the @samp{--enable-auto-import}
8068 command-line option, although it is enabled by default on cygwin/mingw.
8069 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} option itself now serves mainly to
8070 suppress any warnings that are ordinarily emitted when linked objects
8071 trigger the feature's use.
8072
8073 auto-import of variables does not always work flawlessly without
8074 additional assistance. Sometimes, you will see this message
8075
8076 "variable '<var>' can't be auto-imported. Please read the
8077 documentation for ld's @code{--enable-auto-import} for details."
8078
8079 The @samp{--enable-auto-import} documentation explains why this error
8080 occurs, and several methods that can be used to overcome this difficulty.
8081 One of these methods is the @emph{runtime pseudo-relocs} feature, described
8082 below.
8083
8084 @cindex runtime pseudo-relocation
8085 For complex variables imported from DLLs (such as structs or classes),
8086 object files typically contain a base address for the variable and an
8087 offset (@emph{addend}) within the variable--to specify a particular
8088 field or public member, for instance. Unfortunately, the runtime loader used
8089 in win32 environments is incapable of fixing these references at runtime
8090 without the additional information supplied by dllimport/dllexport decorations.
8091 The standard auto-import feature described above is unable to resolve these
8092 references.
8093
8094 The @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} switch allows these references to
8095 be resolved without error, while leaving the task of adjusting the references
8096 themselves (with their non-zero addends) to specialized code provided by the
8097 runtime environment. Recent versions of the cygwin and mingw environments and
8098 compilers provide this runtime support; older versions do not. However, the
8099 support is only necessary on the developer's platform; the compiled result will
8100 run without error on an older system.
8101
8102 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is not the default; it must be explicitly
8103 enabled as needed.
8104
8105 @cindex direct linking to a dll
8106 @item direct linking to a dll
8107 The cygwin/mingw ports of @command{ld} support the direct linking,
8108 including data symbols, to a dll without the usage of any import
8109 libraries. This is much faster and uses much less memory than does the
8110 traditional import library method, especially when linking large
8111 libraries or applications. When @command{ld} creates an import lib, each
8112 function or variable exported from the dll is stored in its own bfd, even
8113 though a single bfd could contain many exports. The overhead involved in
8114 storing, loading, and processing so many bfd's is quite large, and explains the
8115 tremendous time, memory, and storage needed to link against particularly
8116 large or complex libraries when using import libs.
8117
8118 Linking directly to a dll uses no extra command-line switches other than
8119 @samp{-L} and @samp{-l}, because @command{ld} already searches for a number
8120 of names to match each library. All that is needed from the developer's
8121 perspective is an understanding of this search, in order to force ld to
8122 select the dll instead of an import library.
8123
8124
8125 For instance, when ld is called with the argument @samp{-lxxx} it will attempt
8126 to find, in the first directory of its search path,
8127
8128 @example
8129 libxxx.dll.a
8130 xxx.dll.a
8131 libxxx.a
8132 xxx.lib
8133 libxxx.lib
8134 cygxxx.dll (*)
8135 libxxx.dll
8136 xxx.dll
8137 @end example
8138
8139 before moving on to the next directory in the search path.
8140
8141 (*) Actually, this is not @samp{cygxxx.dll} but in fact is @samp{<prefix>xxx.dll},
8142 where @samp{<prefix>} is set by the @command{ld} option
8143 @samp{--dll-search-prefix=<prefix>}. In the case of cygwin, the standard gcc spec
8144 file includes @samp{--dll-search-prefix=cyg}, so in effect we actually search for
8145 @samp{cygxxx.dll}.
8146
8147 Other win32-based unix environments, such as mingw or pw32, may use other
8148 @samp{<prefix>}es, although at present only cygwin makes use of this feature. It
8149 was originally intended to help avoid name conflicts among dll's built for the
8150 various win32/un*x environments, so that (for example) two versions of a zlib dll
8151 could coexist on the same machine.
8152
8153 The generic cygwin/mingw path layout uses a @samp{bin} directory for
8154 applications and dll's and a @samp{lib} directory for the import
8155 libraries (using cygwin nomenclature):
8156
8157 @example
8158 bin/
8159 cygxxx.dll
8160 lib/
8161 libxxx.dll.a (in case of dll's)
8162 libxxx.a (in case of static archive)
8163 @end example
8164
8165 Linking directly to a dll without using the import library can be
8166 done two ways:
8167
8168 1. Use the dll directly by adding the @samp{bin} path to the link line
8169 @example
8170 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../bin/ -lxxx
8171 @end example
8172
8173 However, as the dll's often have version numbers appended to their names
8174 (@samp{cygncurses-5.dll}) this will often fail, unless one specifies
8175 @samp{-L../bin -lncurses-5} to include the version. Import libs are generally
8176 not versioned, and do not have this difficulty.
8177
8178 2. Create a symbolic link from the dll to a file in the @samp{lib}
8179 directory according to the above mentioned search pattern. This
8180 should be used to avoid unwanted changes in the tools needed for
8181 making the app/dll.
8182
8183 @example
8184 ln -s bin/cygxxx.dll lib/[cyg|lib|]xxx.dll[.a]
8185 @end example
8186
8187 Then you can link without any make environment changes.
8188
8189 @example
8190 gcc -Wl,-verbose -o a.exe -L../lib/ -lxxx
8191 @end example
8192
8193 This technique also avoids the version number problems, because the following is
8194 perfectly legal
8195
8196 @example
8197 bin/
8198 cygxxx-5.dll
8199 lib/
8200 libxxx.dll.a -> ../bin/cygxxx-5.dll
8201 @end example
8202
8203 Linking directly to a dll without using an import lib will work
8204 even when auto-import features are exercised, and even when
8205 @samp{--enable-runtime-pseudo-relocs} is used.
8206
8207 Given the improvements in speed and memory usage, one might justifiably
8208 wonder why import libraries are used at all. There are three reasons:
8209
8210 1. Until recently, the link-directly-to-dll functionality did @emph{not}
8211 work with auto-imported data.
8212
8213 2. Sometimes it is necessary to include pure static objects within the
8214 import library (which otherwise contains only bfd's for indirection
8215 symbols that point to the exports of a dll). Again, the import lib
8216 for the cygwin kernel makes use of this ability, and it is not
8217 possible to do this without an import lib.
8218
8219 3. Symbol aliases can only be resolved using an import lib. This is
8220 critical when linking against OS-supplied dll's (eg, the win32 API)
8221 in which symbols are usually exported as undecorated aliases of their
8222 stdcall-decorated assembly names.
8223
8224 So, import libs are not going away. But the ability to replace
8225 true import libs with a simple symbolic link to (or a copy of)
8226 a dll, in many cases, is a useful addition to the suite of tools
8227 binutils makes available to the win32 developer. Given the
8228 massive improvements in memory requirements during linking, storage
8229 requirements, and linking speed, we expect that many developers
8230 will soon begin to use this feature whenever possible.
8231
8232 @item symbol aliasing
8233 @table @emph
8234 @item adding additional names
8235 Sometimes, it is useful to export symbols with additional names.
8236 A symbol @samp{foo} will be exported as @samp{foo}, but it can also be
8237 exported as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the DEF file
8238 when creating the dll. This will affect also the optional created
8239 import library. Consider the following DEF file:
8240
8241 @example
8242 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8243
8244 EXPORTS
8245 foo
8246 _foo = foo
8247 @end example
8248
8249 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the symbol @samp{foo} to @samp{_foo}.
8250
8251 Another method for creating a symbol alias is to create it in the
8252 source code using the "weak" attribute:
8253
8254 @example
8255 void foo () @{ /* Do something. */; @}
8256 void _foo () __attribute__ ((weak, alias ("foo")));
8257 @end example
8258
8259 See the gcc manual for more information about attributes and weak
8260 symbols.
8261
8262 @item renaming symbols
8263 Sometimes it is useful to rename exports. For instance, the cygwin
8264 kernel does this regularly. A symbol @samp{_foo} can be exported as
8265 @samp{foo} but not as @samp{_foo} by using special directives in the
8266 DEF file. (This will also affect the import library, if it is
8267 created). In the following example:
8268
8269 @example
8270 LIBRARY "xyz.dll" BASE=0x61000000
8271
8272 EXPORTS
8273 _foo = foo
8274 @end example
8275
8276 The line @samp{_foo = foo} maps the exported symbol @samp{foo} to
8277 @samp{_foo}.
8278 @end table
8279
8280 Note: using a DEF file disables the default auto-export behavior,
8281 unless the @samp{--export-all-symbols} command-line option is used.
8282 If, however, you are trying to rename symbols, then you should list
8283 @emph{all} desired exports in the DEF file, including the symbols
8284 that are not being renamed, and do @emph{not} use the
8285 @samp{--export-all-symbols} option. If you list only the
8286 renamed symbols in the DEF file, and use @samp{--export-all-symbols}
8287 to handle the other symbols, then the both the new names @emph{and}
8288 the original names for the renamed symbols will be exported.
8289 In effect, you'd be aliasing those symbols, not renaming them,
8290 which is probably not what you wanted.
8291
8292 @cindex weak externals
8293 @item weak externals
8294 The Windows object format, PE, specifies a form of weak symbols called
8295 weak externals. When a weak symbol is linked and the symbol is not
8296 defined, the weak symbol becomes an alias for some other symbol. There
8297 are three variants of weak externals:
8298 @itemize
8299 @item Definition is searched for in objects and libraries, historically
8300 called lazy externals.
8301 @item Definition is searched for only in other objects, not in libraries.
8302 This form is not presently implemented.
8303 @item No search; the symbol is an alias. This form is not presently
8304 implemented.
8305 @end itemize
8306 As a GNU extension, weak symbols that do not specify an alternate symbol
8307 are supported. If the symbol is undefined when linking, the symbol
8308 uses a default value.
8309
8310 @cindex aligned common symbols
8311 @item aligned common symbols
8312 As a GNU extension to the PE file format, it is possible to specify the
8313 desired alignment for a common symbol. This information is conveyed from
8314 the assembler or compiler to the linker by means of GNU-specific commands
8315 carried in the object file's @samp{.drectve} section, which are recognized
8316 by @command{ld} and respected when laying out the common symbols. Native
8317 tools will be able to process object files employing this GNU extension,
8318 but will fail to respect the alignment instructions, and may issue noisy
8319 warnings about unknown linker directives.
8320
8321 @end table
8322
8323 @ifclear GENERIC
8324 @lowersections
8325 @end ifclear
8326 @end ifset
8327
8328 @ifset XTENSA
8329 @ifclear GENERIC
8330 @raisesections
8331 @end ifclear
8332
8333 @node Xtensa
8334 @section @code{ld} and Xtensa Processors
8335
8336 @cindex Xtensa processors
8337 The default @command{ld} behavior for Xtensa processors is to interpret
8338 @code{SECTIONS} commands so that lists of explicitly named sections in a
8339 specification with a wildcard file will be interleaved when necessary to
8340 keep literal pools within the range of PC-relative load offsets. For
8341 example, with the command:
8342
8343 @smallexample
8344 SECTIONS
8345 @{
8346 .text : @{
8347 *(.literal .text)
8348 @}
8349 @}
8350 @end smallexample
8351
8352 @noindent
8353 @command{ld} may interleave some of the @code{.literal}
8354 and @code{.text} sections from different object files to ensure that the
8355 literal pools are within the range of PC-relative load offsets. A valid
8356 interleaving might place the @code{.literal} sections from an initial
8357 group of files followed by the @code{.text} sections of that group of
8358 files. Then, the @code{.literal} sections from the rest of the files
8359 and the @code{.text} sections from the rest of the files would follow.
8360
8361 @cindex @option{--relax} on Xtensa
8362 @cindex relaxing on Xtensa
8363 Relaxation is enabled by default for the Xtensa version of @command{ld} and
8364 provides two important link-time optimizations. The first optimization
8365 is to combine identical literal values to reduce code size. A redundant
8366 literal will be removed and all the @code{L32R} instructions that use it
8367 will be changed to reference an identical literal, as long as the
8368 location of the replacement literal is within the offset range of all
8369 the @code{L32R} instructions. The second optimization is to remove
8370 unnecessary overhead from assembler-generated ``longcall'' sequences of
8371 @code{L32R}/@code{CALLX@var{n}} when the target functions are within
8372 range of direct @code{CALL@var{n}} instructions.
8373
8374 For each of these cases where an indirect call sequence can be optimized
8375 to a direct call, the linker will change the @code{CALLX@var{n}}
8376 instruction to a @code{CALL@var{n}} instruction, remove the @code{L32R}
8377 instruction, and remove the literal referenced by the @code{L32R}
8378 instruction if it is not used for anything else. Removing the
8379 @code{L32R} instruction always reduces code size but can potentially
8380 hurt performance by changing the alignment of subsequent branch targets.
8381 By default, the linker will always preserve alignments, either by
8382 switching some instructions between 24-bit encodings and the equivalent
8383 density instructions or by inserting a no-op in place of the @code{L32R}
8384 instruction that was removed. If code size is more important than
8385 performance, the @option{--size-opt} option can be used to prevent the
8386 linker from widening density instructions or inserting no-ops, except in
8387 a few cases where no-ops are required for correctness.
8388
8389 The following Xtensa-specific command-line options can be used to
8390 control the linker:
8391
8392 @cindex Xtensa options
8393 @table @option
8394 @item --size-opt
8395 When optimizing indirect calls to direct calls, optimize for code size
8396 more than performance. With this option, the linker will not insert
8397 no-ops or widen density instructions to preserve branch target
8398 alignment. There may still be some cases where no-ops are required to
8399 preserve the correctness of the code.
8400 @end table
8401
8402 @ifclear GENERIC
8403 @lowersections
8404 @end ifclear
8405 @end ifset
8406
8407 @ifclear SingleFormat
8408 @node BFD
8409 @chapter BFD
8410
8411 @cindex back end
8412 @cindex object file management
8413 @cindex object formats available
8414 @kindex objdump -i
8415 The linker accesses object and archive files using the BFD libraries.
8416 These libraries allow the linker to use the same routines to operate on
8417 object files whatever the object file format. A different object file
8418 format can be supported simply by creating a new BFD back end and adding
8419 it to the library. To conserve runtime memory, however, the linker and
8420 associated tools are usually configured to support only a subset of the
8421 object file formats available. You can use @code{objdump -i}
8422 (@pxref{objdump,,objdump,binutils.info,The GNU Binary Utilities}) to
8423 list all the formats available for your configuration.
8424
8425 @cindex BFD requirements
8426 @cindex requirements for BFD
8427 As with most implementations, BFD is a compromise between
8428 several conflicting requirements. The major factor influencing
8429 BFD design was efficiency: any time used converting between
8430 formats is time which would not have been spent had BFD not
8431 been involved. This is partly offset by abstraction payback; since
8432 BFD simplifies applications and back ends, more time and care
8433 may be spent optimizing algorithms for a greater speed.
8434
8435 One minor artifact of the BFD solution which you should bear in
8436 mind is the potential for information loss. There are two places where
8437 useful information can be lost using the BFD mechanism: during
8438 conversion and during output. @xref{BFD information loss}.
8439
8440 @menu
8441 * BFD outline:: How it works: an outline of BFD
8442 @end menu
8443
8444 @node BFD outline
8445 @section How It Works: An Outline of BFD
8446 @cindex opening object files
8447 @include bfdsumm.texi
8448 @end ifclear
8449
8450 @node Reporting Bugs
8451 @chapter Reporting Bugs
8452 @cindex bugs in @command{ld}
8453 @cindex reporting bugs in @command{ld}
8454
8455 Your bug reports play an essential role in making @command{ld} reliable.
8456
8457 Reporting a bug may help you by bringing a solution to your problem, or
8458 it may not. But in any case the principal function of a bug report is
8459 to help the entire community by making the next version of @command{ld}
8460 work better. Bug reports are your contribution to the maintenance of
8461 @command{ld}.
8462
8463 In order for a bug report to serve its purpose, you must include the
8464 information that enables us to fix the bug.
8465
8466 @menu
8467 * Bug Criteria:: Have you found a bug?
8468 * Bug Reporting:: How to report bugs
8469 @end menu
8470
8471 @node Bug Criteria
8472 @section Have You Found a Bug?
8473 @cindex bug criteria
8474
8475 If you are not sure whether you have found a bug, here are some guidelines:
8476
8477 @itemize @bullet
8478 @cindex fatal signal
8479 @cindex linker crash
8480 @cindex crash of linker
8481 @item
8482 If the linker gets a fatal signal, for any input whatever, that is a
8483 @command{ld} bug. Reliable linkers never crash.
8484
8485 @cindex error on valid input
8486 @item
8487 If @command{ld} produces an error message for valid input, that is a bug.
8488
8489 @cindex invalid input
8490 @item
8491 If @command{ld} does not produce an error message for invalid input, that
8492 may be a bug. In the general case, the linker can not verify that
8493 object files are correct.
8494
8495 @item
8496 If you are an experienced user of linkers, your suggestions for
8497 improvement of @command{ld} are welcome in any case.
8498 @end itemize
8499
8500 @node Bug Reporting
8501 @section How to Report Bugs
8502 @cindex bug reports
8503 @cindex @command{ld} bugs, reporting
8504
8505 A number of companies and individuals offer support for @sc{gnu}
8506 products. If you obtained @command{ld} from a support organization, we
8507 recommend you contact that organization first.
8508
8509 You can find contact information for many support companies and
8510 individuals in the file @file{etc/SERVICE} in the @sc{gnu} Emacs
8511 distribution.
8512
8513 @ifset BUGURL
8514 Otherwise, send bug reports for @command{ld} to
8515 @value{BUGURL}.
8516 @end ifset
8517
8518 The fundamental principle of reporting bugs usefully is this:
8519 @strong{report all the facts}. If you are not sure whether to state a
8520 fact or leave it out, state it!
8521
8522 Often people omit facts because they think they know what causes the
8523 problem and assume that some details do not matter. Thus, you might
8524 assume that the name of a symbol you use in an example does not
8525 matter. Well, probably it does not, but one cannot be sure. Perhaps
8526 the bug is a stray memory reference which happens to fetch from the
8527 location where that name is stored in memory; perhaps, if the name
8528 were different, the contents of that location would fool the linker
8529 into doing the right thing despite the bug. Play it safe and give a
8530 specific, complete example. That is the easiest thing for you to do,
8531 and the most helpful.
8532
8533 Keep in mind that the purpose of a bug report is to enable us to fix
8534 the bug if it is new to us. Therefore, always write your bug reports
8535 on the assumption that the bug has not been reported previously.
8536
8537 Sometimes people give a few sketchy facts and ask, ``Does this ring a
8538 bell?'' This cannot help us fix a bug, so it is basically useless. We
8539 respond by asking for enough details to enable us to investigate.
8540 You might as well expedite matters by sending them to begin with.
8541
8542 To enable us to fix the bug, you should include all these things:
8543
8544 @itemize @bullet
8545 @item
8546 The version of @command{ld}. @command{ld} announces it if you start it with
8547 the @samp{--version} argument.
8548
8549 Without this, we will not know whether there is any point in looking for
8550 the bug in the current version of @command{ld}.
8551
8552 @item
8553 Any patches you may have applied to the @command{ld} source, including any
8554 patches made to the @code{BFD} library.
8555
8556 @item
8557 The type of machine you are using, and the operating system name and
8558 version number.
8559
8560 @item
8561 What compiler (and its version) was used to compile @command{ld}---e.g.
8562 ``@code{gcc-2.7}''.
8563
8564 @item
8565 The command arguments you gave the linker to link your example and
8566 observe the bug. To guarantee you will not omit something important,
8567 list them all. A copy of the Makefile (or the output from make) is
8568 sufficient.
8569
8570 If we were to try to guess the arguments, we would probably guess wrong
8571 and then we might not encounter the bug.
8572
8573 @item
8574 A complete input file, or set of input files, that will reproduce the
8575 bug. It is generally most helpful to send the actual object files
8576 provided that they are reasonably small. Say no more than 10K. For
8577 bigger files you can either make them available by FTP or HTTP or else
8578 state that you are willing to send the object file(s) to whomever
8579 requests them. (Note - your email will be going to a mailing list, so
8580 we do not want to clog it up with large attachments). But small
8581 attachments are best.
8582
8583 If the source files were assembled using @code{gas} or compiled using
8584 @code{gcc}, then it may be OK to send the source files rather than the
8585 object files. In this case, be sure to say exactly what version of
8586 @code{gas} or @code{gcc} was used to produce the object files. Also say
8587 how @code{gas} or @code{gcc} were configured.
8588
8589 @item
8590 A description of what behavior you observe that you believe is
8591 incorrect. For example, ``It gets a fatal signal.''
8592
8593 Of course, if the bug is that @command{ld} gets a fatal signal, then we
8594 will certainly notice it. But if the bug is incorrect output, we might
8595 not notice unless it is glaringly wrong. You might as well not give us
8596 a chance to make a mistake.
8597
8598 Even if the problem you experience is a fatal signal, you should still
8599 say so explicitly. Suppose something strange is going on, such as, your
8600 copy of @command{ld} is out of sync, or you have encountered a bug in the
8601 C library on your system. (This has happened!) Your copy might crash
8602 and ours would not. If you told us to expect a crash, then when ours
8603 fails to crash, we would know that the bug was not happening for us. If
8604 you had not told us to expect a crash, then we would not be able to draw
8605 any conclusion from our observations.
8606
8607 @item
8608 If you wish to suggest changes to the @command{ld} source, send us context
8609 diffs, as generated by @code{diff} with the @samp{-u}, @samp{-c}, or
8610 @samp{-p} option. Always send diffs from the old file to the new file.
8611 If you even discuss something in the @command{ld} source, refer to it by
8612 context, not by line number.
8613
8614 The line numbers in our development sources will not match those in your
8615 sources. Your line numbers would convey no useful information to us.
8616 @end itemize
8617
8618 Here are some things that are not necessary:
8619
8620 @itemize @bullet
8621 @item
8622 A description of the envelope of the bug.
8623
8624 Often people who encounter a bug spend a lot of time investigating
8625 which changes to the input file will make the bug go away and which
8626 changes will not affect it.
8627
8628 This is often time consuming and not very useful, because the way we
8629 will find the bug is by running a single example under the debugger
8630 with breakpoints, not by pure deduction from a series of examples.
8631 We recommend that you save your time for something else.
8632
8633 Of course, if you can find a simpler example to report @emph{instead}
8634 of the original one, that is a convenience for us. Errors in the
8635 output will be easier to spot, running under the debugger will take
8636 less time, and so on.
8637
8638 However, simplification is not vital; if you do not want to do this,
8639 report the bug anyway and send us the entire test case you used.
8640
8641 @item
8642 A patch for the bug.
8643
8644 A patch for the bug does help us if it is a good one. But do not omit
8645 the necessary information, such as the test case, on the assumption that
8646 a patch is all we need. We might see problems with your patch and decide
8647 to fix the problem another way, or we might not understand it at all.
8648
8649 Sometimes with a program as complicated as @command{ld} it is very hard to
8650 construct an example that will make the program follow a certain path
8651 through the code. If you do not send us the example, we will not be
8652 able to construct one, so we will not be able to verify that the bug is
8653 fixed.
8654
8655 And if we cannot understand what bug you are trying to fix, or why your
8656 patch should be an improvement, we will not install it. A test case will
8657 help us to understand.
8658
8659 @item
8660 A guess about what the bug is or what it depends on.
8661
8662 Such guesses are usually wrong. Even we cannot guess right about such
8663 things without first using the debugger to find the facts.
8664 @end itemize
8665
8666 @node MRI
8667 @appendix MRI Compatible Script Files
8668 @cindex MRI compatibility
8669 To aid users making the transition to @sc{gnu} @command{ld} from the MRI
8670 linker, @command{ld} can use MRI compatible linker scripts as an
8671 alternative to the more general-purpose linker scripting language
8672 described in @ref{Scripts}. MRI compatible linker scripts have a much
8673 simpler command set than the scripting language otherwise used with
8674 @command{ld}. @sc{gnu} @command{ld} supports the most commonly used MRI
8675 linker commands; these commands are described here.
8676
8677 In general, MRI scripts aren't of much use with the @code{a.out} object
8678 file format, since it only has three sections and MRI scripts lack some
8679 features to make use of them.
8680
8681 You can specify a file containing an MRI-compatible script using the
8682 @samp{-c} command-line option.
8683
8684 Each command in an MRI-compatible script occupies its own line; each
8685 command line starts with the keyword that identifies the command (though
8686 blank lines are also allowed for punctuation). If a line of an
8687 MRI-compatible script begins with an unrecognized keyword, @command{ld}
8688 issues a warning message, but continues processing the script.
8689
8690 Lines beginning with @samp{*} are comments.
8691
8692 You can write these commands using all upper-case letters, or all
8693 lower case; for example, @samp{chip} is the same as @samp{CHIP}.
8694 The following list shows only the upper-case form of each command.
8695
8696 @table @code
8697 @cindex @code{ABSOLUTE} (MRI)
8698 @item ABSOLUTE @var{secname}
8699 @itemx ABSOLUTE @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8700 Normally, @command{ld} includes in the output file all sections from all
8701 the input files. However, in an MRI-compatible script, you can use the
8702 @code{ABSOLUTE} command to restrict the sections that will be present in
8703 your output program. If the @code{ABSOLUTE} command is used at all in a
8704 script, then only the sections named explicitly in @code{ABSOLUTE}
8705 commands will appear in the linker output. You can still use other
8706 input sections (whatever you select on the command line, or using
8707 @code{LOAD}) to resolve addresses in the output file.
8708
8709 @cindex @code{ALIAS} (MRI)
8710 @item ALIAS @var{out-secname}, @var{in-secname}
8711 Use this command to place the data from input section @var{in-secname}
8712 in a section called @var{out-secname} in the linker output file.
8713
8714 @var{in-secname} may be an integer.
8715
8716 @cindex @code{ALIGN} (MRI)
8717 @item ALIGN @var{secname} = @var{expression}
8718 Align the section called @var{secname} to @var{expression}. The
8719 @var{expression} should be a power of two.
8720
8721 @cindex @code{BASE} (MRI)
8722 @item BASE @var{expression}
8723 Use the value of @var{expression} as the lowest address (other than
8724 absolute addresses) in the output file.
8725
8726 @cindex @code{CHIP} (MRI)
8727 @item CHIP @var{expression}
8728 @itemx CHIP @var{expression}, @var{expression}
8729 This command does nothing; it is accepted only for compatibility.
8730
8731 @cindex @code{END} (MRI)
8732 @item END
8733 This command does nothing whatever; it's only accepted for compatibility.
8734
8735 @cindex @code{FORMAT} (MRI)
8736 @item FORMAT @var{output-format}
8737 Similar to the @code{OUTPUT_FORMAT} command in the more general linker
8738 language, but restricted to S-records, if @var{output-format} is @samp{S}
8739
8740 @cindex @code{LIST} (MRI)
8741 @item LIST @var{anything}@dots{}
8742 Print (to the standard output file) a link map, as produced by the
8743 @command{ld} command-line option @samp{-M}.
8744
8745 The keyword @code{LIST} may be followed by anything on the
8746 same line, with no change in its effect.
8747
8748 @cindex @code{LOAD} (MRI)
8749 @item LOAD @var{filename}
8750 @itemx LOAD @var{filename}, @var{filename}, @dots{} @var{filename}
8751 Include one or more object file @var{filename} in the link; this has the
8752 same effect as specifying @var{filename} directly on the @command{ld}
8753 command line.
8754
8755 @cindex @code{NAME} (MRI)
8756 @item NAME @var{output-name}
8757 @var{output-name} is the name for the program produced by @command{ld}; the
8758 MRI-compatible command @code{NAME} is equivalent to the command-line
8759 option @samp{-o} or the general script language command @code{OUTPUT}.
8760
8761 @cindex @code{ORDER} (MRI)
8762 @item ORDER @var{secname}, @var{secname}, @dots{} @var{secname}
8763 @itemx ORDER @var{secname} @var{secname} @var{secname}
8764 Normally, @command{ld} orders the sections in its output file in the
8765 order in which they first appear in the input files. In an MRI-compatible
8766 script, you can override this ordering with the @code{ORDER} command. The
8767 sections you list with @code{ORDER} will appear first in your output
8768 file, in the order specified.
8769
8770 @cindex @code{PUBLIC} (MRI)
8771 @item PUBLIC @var{name}=@var{expression}
8772 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name},@var{expression}
8773 @itemx PUBLIC @var{name} @var{expression}
8774 Supply a value (@var{expression}) for external symbol
8775 @var{name} used in the linker input files.
8776
8777 @cindex @code{SECT} (MRI)
8778 @item SECT @var{secname}, @var{expression}
8779 @itemx SECT @var{secname}=@var{expression}
8780 @itemx SECT @var{secname} @var{expression}
8781 You can use any of these three forms of the @code{SECT} command to
8782 specify the start address (@var{expression}) for section @var{secname}.
8783 If you have more than one @code{SECT} statement for the same
8784 @var{secname}, only the @emph{first} sets the start address.
8785 @end table
8786
8787 @node GNU Free Documentation License
8788 @appendix GNU Free Documentation License
8789 @include fdl.texi
8790
8791 @node LD Index
8792 @unnumbered LD Index
8793
8794 @printindex cp
8795
8796 @tex
8797 % I think something like @@colophon should be in texinfo. In the
8798 % meantime:
8799 \long\def\colophon{\hbox to0pt{}\vfill
8800 \centerline{The body of this manual is set in}
8801 \centerline{\fontname\tenrm,}
8802 \centerline{with headings in {\bf\fontname\tenbf}}
8803 \centerline{and examples in {\tt\fontname\tentt}.}
8804 \centerline{{\it\fontname\tenit\/} and}
8805 \centerline{{\sl\fontname\tensl\/}}
8806 \centerline{are used for emphasis.}\vfill}
8807 \page\colophon
8808 % Blame: doc@@cygnus.com, 28mar91.
8809 @end tex
8810
8811 @bye
This page took 0.217373 seconds and 4 git commands to generate.